Chevrolet 2011 Malibu Users Manual 00 Introduction 1..6

2011 Malibu to the manual e1f5e607-bbf0-4408-8b2c-2c735fa28b7b

2015-01-21

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2011-Malibu-Users-Manual-244487 chevrolet-2011-malibu-users-manual-244487 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 390 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M
In Brief ........................ 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors..........................2-9
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Roof..........................2-18
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-30
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Phone........................7-25
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-24
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2011 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Index ..................... i-1
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Introduction iii
The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,
the CHEVROLET Emblem,
MALIBU, and the MALIBU Emblem
are trademarks and/or service
marks of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited”for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20786885 B Second Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
iv Introduction
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
{WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,”or “Do not let
this happen.”
Symbols
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
M:This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
*:This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
9:Airbag Readiness Light
#:Air Conditioning
!:Antilock Brake System (ABS)
%:Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar
®
$:Brake System Warning Light
":Charging System
I:Cruise Control
B:Engine Coolant Temperature
O:Exterior Lamps
#:Fog Lamps
.:Fuel Gauge
+:Fuses
3:Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j:LATCH System Child
Restraints
*:Malfunction Indicator Lamp
::Oil Pressure
}:Power
/:Remote Vehicle Start
>:Safety Belt Reminders
7:Tire Pressure Monitor
d:Traction Control
M:Windshield Washer Fluid
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
vi Introduction
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-1
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Portable Audio Devices
(Auxiliary Input or
USB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Bluetooth
®
................... 1-17
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-21
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Roadside Assistance
Program .................... 1-22
OnStar
®
..................... 1-23
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals on page 6‑4.
C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
E. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4‑1.
F. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
G. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
H. Driver Compartment Storage.
See Front Storage on page 4‑2.
I. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
J. Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑22.
K. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out
of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑15.
L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
M. Horn on page 5‑3.
N. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2(If Equipped).
O. Ignition Positions on page 9‑16.
P. Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1(If Equipped).
Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑5(If
Equipped) .
Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
R. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑24.
S. Front Storage on page 4‑2.
Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
T. Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑32.
U. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑29.
V. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to
remotely lock and unlock the doors
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from
the vehicle.
Press Kto unlock the driver door.
Press again within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.
Press Qto lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑30 for
additional information.
Press and hold Vfor
approximately one second to open
the trunk.
Press Land release to locate the
vehicle.
Press Land hold for more than
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press Lagain to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑2and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold /until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-5
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
.Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
.Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5.
Door Locks
Manual Locks
From inside the vehicle slide the
door lock knob to unlock or lock
a door.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks,
the switches are on the front doors.
":Press to unlock the doors.
Q:Press to lock the doors.
For more information, see:
.Door Locks on page 2‑7.
.Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release
button on the RKE transmitter, there
is a remote release Vbutton
located on the driver door near the
map pocket.
The trunk can only be opened when
the vehicle is in P (Park), or when
the ignition is off.
See Trunk on page 2‑9.
Windows
On vehicles with power windows,
the switches are on the driver door
armrest. Each passenger door has a
switch that controls only that
window.
Press the front of the switch to open
the window. Pull the switch up to
close it.
See Power Windows on page 2‑16.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-6 In Brief
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
Seat Position
To adjust the seat position:
1. Lift the bar under the front of the
seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure it is locked in
place.
Height Adjustment
If available, press and hold the top
or bottom of the switch to raise or
lower the seat. Release the switch
when the desired height is reached.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Seatback Adjustment
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-7
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See “Manual Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
Power Seats
Seat Position
To adjust a power seat, if available:
.Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.Raise or lower the front or rear
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
horizontal control up or down.
.Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire control up
or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
Seatback Adjustment
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
.Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-8 In Brief
Lumbar Adjustment
A. Increase Lumbar Support
Control
B. Decrease Lumbar Support
Control
If available, press the front (A) or
rear (B) of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support. Release
the control when the desired level of
support is reached.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
Second Row Seats
With this feature, either side of the
seatback can be folded down for
more cargo space. Before folding a
seatback, make sure the front seat
is not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down all
the way.
To lower the rear seatback, pull up
on the seatback strap while folding
the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk. To raise the
rear seatback pull the seatback up
and make sure it latches.
Push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked in position. Make
sure that the safety belts are
properly stowed over the seatback
in all three positions.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑8for
more information.
Heated Seats
If available, press the top of the
switch to turn the heat feature on to
the high heat setting. The indicator
light “2”will be lit.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-9
Press the top of the switch again to
go to the low heat setting. The
indicator light “1”will be lit.
Press the bottom of the switch to
turn the feature off.
The heated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned off.
For more information, see Heated
Front Seats on page 3‑7.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Safety Belts
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
.Safety Belts on page 3‑9.
.How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑13.
.Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.
.Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑48.
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags are
not affected by this.
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle is
started.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-10 In Brief
United States
Canada and Mexico
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑32 for important information.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
1. Move the selector switch located
below the four-way control pad
to the left or right to choose
either the driver side or
passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.
Interior Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming
rearview mirror will automatically
reduce the glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind.
The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each
time the ignition is turned to start.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑14.
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-11
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
The lever is located on the left side
of the steering wheel column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any
door is opened. They turn off after
all the doors are closed.
To turn the dome lamps on
manually, turn the instrument panel
brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering column, clockwise to the
farthest position. The dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is
opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
The front reading lamps are located
in the front overhead console. The
rear reading lamps are near the
dome lamp overhead near the rear
passenger seats.
For vehicles with front and/or rear
reading lamps, press the lens to
turn the lamp on and off, while the
doors are closed. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
For more information on interior
lighting, see:
.Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
.Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑5.
.Parade Dimming on page 6‑6.
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-12 In Brief
Exterior Lighting
P:Briefly turn to this position to
manually turn the automatic lamp
control off or on.
In Canada, this position only works
when a vehicle is in the P (Park)
position. When the vehicle is put
into D (Drive) the lights come on.
AUTO: Automatically turns on the
Daytime Running Lamps during
daytime, and the headlamps,
parking lamps, and taillamps at
night.
;:Manual operation of the parking
lamps and taillamps.
2:Manual operation of the
headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
For more information, see:
.Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
.Delayed Headlamps on
page 6‑3.
.Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑2.
.Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑3.
.Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper lever is
located on the right side of the
steering column.
9:Turns the wipers off.
&:For intermittent or speed
sensitive operation. While in this
position, turn the xband up or
down to vary frequency.
The amount of delay time varies
between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed
of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is
increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or
decreases.
6:Slow wipes.
1:Fast wipes.
8:Use for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer: Press the
button at the end of the lever until
the washers begin.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-13
Climate Controls
A. Fan Control
B. Air Recirculation
C. Temperature Control
D. Outside Air
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window Defogger
See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1(If Equipped).
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-14 In Brief
Automatic Climate Control System (If Equipped)
A. Fan Control
B. Air Conditioning
C. Air Recirculation
D. Outside Air
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Display
H. Temperature Control
See Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑5(If Equipped).
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-15
Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
This position allows you to change
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
2. Press the + (plus) end of the
button on the side of the shifter
to upshift, or push the −(minus)
end of the button to downshift.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑25.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown
O:Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between
FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
f:Select radio stations.
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-16 In Brief
© ¨ :Seek or scan stations.
4:For vehicles with XM, MP3,
WMA, or RDS features, press to
display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or
XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA
song. Song title information will be
displayed on the top line of the
display while the artist information
will be displayed on the bottom line,
if the information is available during
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.
When information is not available,
"No Info" displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Infotainment on page 7‑1and
Operation on page 7‑3.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the
vehicle has, radio stations are
stored as either favorites or presets.
For radios with a FAV button, a
maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio
station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™
stations.
For radios without a FAV button, up
to 18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and
6 AM), can be programmed on the
6 numbered buttons.
See Operation on page 7‑3.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB port
or Radio with a Single CD (MP3)
player:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
2. Press Oto turn the radio on.
3. Press Hand the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
day, and year) displays.
4. Press the softkey located below
any one of the tabs that you
want to change.
5. Increase or decrease the time or
date by turning fclockwise or
counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting
the clock for your specific audio
system, see Clock on page 5‑5.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-17
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM satellite radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the
XM service.
For more information, refer to:
.www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑10.
Portable Audio Devices
(Auxiliary Input or
USB Port)
This vehicle may have an 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and a
USB port, located on the audio
faceplate. Some portable audio
devices such as iPods
®
, MP3
players, and USB storage devices
can be connected to the vehicle
using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a
USB cable.
For more information, see Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑20.
Bluetooth
®
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
system, it allows users with a
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls
using the vehicle’s audio system
and controls.
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired with the Bluetooth
system before it can be used in the
vehicle. Not all phones will support
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth
on page 7‑25.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-18 In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls
If equipped, some audio controls
can be adjusted using the controls
on the right side of the steering
wheel.
e+ / e:Increases or decreases
volume.
w/xc:Press to change radio
stations, select tracks on a CD, or to
select tracks and navigate folders
on an iPod
®
or USB device.
bg:Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
the OnStar
®
or Bluetooth systems.
xc:Press to reject an
incoming call, or to end a call.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
Cruise Control
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
J:Press to turn the cruise control
system on and off.
RES+: Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume a previously set
speed or press and hold to
accelerate.
SET−:Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
For more information, see Cruise
Control on page 9‑32.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-19
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the
bottom of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems and enables
access to the personalization menu.
The DIC buttons are located on the
left side of the steering wheel.
INFO: Press to scroll through the
vehicle information displays.
r:Press to reset some vehicle
information displays, select a
personalization setting,
or acknowledge a warning
message.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑22.
Vehicle Personalization
Some vehicle features can be
programmed by using the DIC
buttons on the left side of the
steering wheel. These features
include:
.Oil Life Reset
.Units
.RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
.Door Lock and Unlock Settings
.Language
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑30.
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are two accessory power
outlets. One accessory power outlet
is located inside the storage bin
below the climate controls and the
other outlet is on the rear of the
center storage console.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-20 In Brief
Performance and
Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on
automatically every time the vehicle
is started.
.To turn off traction control, press
and release ton the
instrument panel. Filluminates
and the appropriate DIC
message is displayed. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑27.
.Press and release the button
again to turn on traction control.
For more information, see Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑29.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
system assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. The system turns
on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
.To turn off both traction control
and Electronic Stability Control,
press and hold tuntil F
illuminates and the appropriate
DIC message is displayed. See
Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑27.
.Press and release the button
again to turn on both systems.
For more information, see Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
Black plate (21,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-21
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑53.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. The kit can be used
to temporarily seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑67 for complete
operating information.
If the vehicle came with a jack and
spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑65.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the “Change Oil Soon”
DIC message when it is necessary
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
with the engine off.
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO
and reset buttons, on the left
side of the steering wheel,
at the same time to enter the
personalization menu. The “Oil
Life Reset”message displays.
3. Press and hold the reset button
until the DIC display shows
“Acknowledged.”
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑37. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑35.
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
.Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
Black plate (22,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-22 In Brief
.When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
.Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.Combine several trips into a
single trip.
.Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
.Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Roadside Assistance
Program
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
information.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Qbutton
and the current GPS location will be
sent to an OnStar advisor who will
assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help
you need.
Online Owner Center (U.S. and
Canada)
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Sign up today at:
www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
Black plate (23,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
In Brief 1-23
OnStar
®
For vehicles with an active OnStar
subscription, OnStar uses several
innovative technologies and live
Advisors to provide a wide range of
safety, security, navigation,
diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built‐in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
Advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see if
you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q:Push this blue button to
connect to a specially trained
OnStar Advisor to verify your
account information and to answer
questions.
]:Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar Emergency
Advisors.
X:Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for Hands‐Free
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation.
Automatic Crash Response,
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling
are available on most vehicles. Not
all OnStar services are available on
all vehicles. For more information,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide;
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the
Qbutton to speak with an OnStar
Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
OnStar service requires wireless
communication networks and the
Global Positioning System (GPS)
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
OnStar service can’t work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
service provider has coverage,
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar
service. Service involving location
information about the vehicle can’t
work unless GPS signals are
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
Black plate (24,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
1-24 In Brief
hardware. The vehicle has to have a
working electrical system and
adequate battery power for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar equipment isn’t properly
installed or you haven’t maintained
it and the vehicle is in good working
order and in compliance with all
government regulations. If you try to
add, connect, or modify any
equipment or software in the
vehicle, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
control may prevent service to you,
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design
and architecture of the vehicle,
damage to important parts of the
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
network congestion or jamming.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar Hands-Free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2for more information.
On some vehicles, the Talk button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not
be functioning properly. Push the
Qbutton and request a vehicle
diagnostic check. If the light
appears clear (no light appears),
your OnStar subscription has
expired and all services have been
deactivated. Push the Qbutton to
confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys .......................... 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Doors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-11
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
{WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition
and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag
that the dealer or qualified locksmith
can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not
in your vehicle.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If you are locked out of your vehicle,
contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑8or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
.Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3
.Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement”later
in this section.
.If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
60 m (195 feet) away from the
vehicle.
Keep in mind that other conditions,
such as those previously stated, can
impact the performance of the
transmitter.
With Remote Start Shown, Without
Remote Start Similar
/(Remote Vehicle Start): For
vehicles with this feature, press to
operate the remote start feature.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5for additional information.
Q(Lock): Press to lock all the
doors. The interior lamps turn off
after all of the doors are closed.
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
remote lock feedback can be
programmed to have the horn chirp
and/or the turn signals flash to
confirm locking. See “LOCK HORN”
and “LIGHT FLASH”under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑30 for
more information.
Pressing Qmay also arm the
anti-theft alarm system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑11.
K(Unlock): Press once to unlock
the driver door. Press Kagain
within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors. The interior lamps
turn on and stay on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the
remote unlock feedback can be
programmed to have the horn chirp
and/or the turn signals flash to
confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
HORN”and “LIGHT FLASH”under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑30 for more information.
The high‐beam headlamps, parking
lamps, and back‐up lamps may
come on each time Kis pressed.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS”under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑30 for additional information.
Pressing Kon the RKE transmitter
disarms the anti-theft alarm system.
See Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑11.
V(Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the trunk. The
trunk can be opened with the
transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 3 km/h (2 mph) or when
the ignition is off.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The horn sounds
three times and the headlamps and
turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold Lfor more than
two seconds to initiate the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
headlamps and turn signals flash for
30 seconds. Press Lagain to
cancel the panic alarm.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also be
programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the
new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB
BATT (Battery) LOW message
displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB
BATT (Battery) LOW”under Key
and Lock Messages on page 5‑27
for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into the
notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that allows you to
start the engine from outside the
vehicle. It may also start the
vehicle's heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger.
When the remote start system is
active and the vehicle has an
automatic climate control system, it
will automatically regulate the inside
temperature. Normal operation of
these systems will return after the
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters.
For example, some laws may
require a person using remote start
to have the vehicle in view when
doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting
of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature
if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your
vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle
is running.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2for
additional information.
/(Remote Start): This button will
be on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle has remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote
start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press and release the
transmitter's lock button, then
immediately press and hold the
transmitter's remote start button
for about four seconds or until
the vehicle's turn signal lamps
flash. The doors will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the
parking lamps turn on and
remain on while the engine is
running.
The remote start feature provides
two separate starts per ignition
cycle, each with 10 minutes of
engine running time, or one start
with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get
two separate 10 minute starts.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows
If it is the first remote start since the
vehicle has been driven, repeat the
previous steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine
running time by 10 minutes from the
time you repeat the steps for remote
starting. The remote start running
time can be extended one time and
only after the first remote start.
After entering the vehicle during a
remote start, insert and turn the key
to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off
automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been
done or the vehicle's key is inserted
into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start,
do any of the following.
.Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and release
the remote start button.
.Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.Turn the ignition switch out of
LOCK/OFF position and then
back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to
indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started
two times, or one time with a time
extension, the vehicle's ignition
must be turned to ON/RUN using
the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑16 for
information regarding the ignition
positions on your vehicle.
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if any of the follow
occur:
.The vehicle's key is in the
ignition.
.The vehicle's hood is open.
.The hazard warning flashers
are on.
.The check engine light is on.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑15.
.The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
.The oil pressure is low.
.Two remote vehicle starts,
or one start with a time
extension, have already been
provided for that ignition cycle.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the
remote vehicle start feature, it may
have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer to
add the manufacturer's remote
vehicle start feature.
See your dealer if you would like to
add the manufacturer's remote
vehicle start feature to your vehicle.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7
Door Locks
{WARNING
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
.Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
the vehicle. Locking the doors
can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, turn the key in the
driver's door lock counterclockwise
to lock the door and clockwise to
unlock it or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
From the inside, move the manual
lock control on the door or use the
power door lock switch.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches
on the front doors can be used to
lock and unlock the vehicle.
K(Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Q(Lock): Remove the key from
the ignition and press to lock the
doors.
Door Ajar Reminder
A chime will sound and the DOOR
AJAR message will display if one of
the doors is not fully closed. This
happens when the ignition is on and
the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park) or N (Neutral). See Door
Ajar Messages on page 5‑26.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows
Delayed Locking
This feature will delay the actual
locking of the doors and arming of
the theft-deterrent system for
five seconds when the power door
lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the
vehicle, three chimes will sound
signaling that the delayed locking
feature is active. Five seconds after
the last door is closed, all of the
doors will lock. To cancel the delay
and lock the doors immediately,
press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or the
power door lock switch a second
time. The theft deterrent system will
arm after 30 seconds.
Automatic Door Locks
The vehicle is programmed to lock
all doors automatically when the
following are met:
.All doors are closed.
.The ignition is on.
.The vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
This feature cannot be disabled.
All doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
The power door unlock function can
be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑30.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock
switch when the key is in the
ignition and any door is open, all the
doors will lock and then the driver's
door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when
locking your vehicle.
If the remote keyless entry
transmitter is used to lock the doors
while the key is in the ignition, a
chime will sound three times. All
doors will then lock.
Safety Locks
The vehicle has rear door security
locks to prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the
inside.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9
Open the rear doors to access the
security locks on the inside edge of
each door.
To set the locks, insert a key into
the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
opened from the outside with the
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the
vertical position.
Doors
Trunk
Press the trunk release button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter for one second to open
the trunk from the outside.
{WARNING
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.Close all of the windows.
.Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑22.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Trunk Release
Press the button located on the
driver door near the map pocket to
open the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while
the vehicle is in P (Park) or when
the ignition is off.
Close the trunk by pulling on the
handle.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark
emergency trunk release handle
located inside the trunk on the trunk
latch. This handle glows following
exposure to light. Pull the release
handle up to open the trunk from the
inside.
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Your vehicle may have an anti-theft
alarm system.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, press the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter lock button to arm the
system.
The system will arm 30 seconds
after all the doors are closed,
or 60 seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the
transmitter a second time while all
the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will
still arm in 60 seconds if a door is
open. When the open door is
closed, the system will arm.
The security light, located on the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed,
the security light flashes once every
three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice
per second, this means that a door
is open.
If the system is armed and the key
is used to unlock the vehicle, the
alarm will be activated.
If you do not want to arm the
system, lock the vehicle with the
manual lock knob on the doors or
with the inside power door lock
switches.
The alarm will sound and the
exterior lights will flash if any door is
opened while armed.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system:
.Press the RKE transmitter
unlock button.
.Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Once the system is disarmed, the
security light will stop flashing.
How the System Alarm is
Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
.Open the driver's door or trunk.
A ten second pre-alarm chirp
will sound followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn
and lights.
.Open any other door. A full
alarm of horn and lights will
immediately sound for
thirty seconds.
.Open the hood. If the vehicle
has the remote start feature, it
will activate the full alarm.
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows
When an alarm event has finished,
the system will re-arm itself
automatically.
How to Turn Off the System
Alarm
To turn off the system alarm:
.Press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter. The system will
then re-arm itself.
.Press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter. This will also
disarm the system.
.Insert the key in the ignition and
turn it on. This will also disarm
the system.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
If three chirps are heard when the
unlock or lock button is pressed on
the RKE transmitter, it means that
the system alarm was previously
triggered.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The key
uses a transponder that matches an
immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key. If the engine
does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent
system decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys can
be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for
programming additional keys only.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1
stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed
key in the ignition and start the
engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn
the key to LOCK/OFF, and
remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed
and turn it to ON/RUN within
five seconds of the original key
being turned to LOCK/OFF in
Step 3.
The security light will turn off
once the key has been
programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security light
went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
additional keys are to be
programmed.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Mirrors
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located
below the four-way control pad
to the left or right to choose
either the driver side or
passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired
direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to
prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
return to its original position.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
<(Rear Defogger): Press to heat
the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger”under
Automatic Climate Control System
on page 8‑5for more information.
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in
the center to move it for a clearer
view of behind your vehicle. Adjust
the mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it
for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar
®
have three
additional control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information on the
system and how to subscribe to
OnStar
®
. See the OnStar
®
owner
guide for more information about the
services OnStar
®
provides.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror with
a compass display and OnStar
®
controls. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15
to subscribe to OnStar
®
. See the
OnStar
®
owner's guide for more
information about the services
OnStar
®
provides.
See Compass on page 5‑4for more
information.
O(On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Operation
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. The dimming feature comes
on and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Windows
{WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
The power window switches are
located on the armrest on the
driver's door. In addition, there is a
switch on each passenger door.
Express-Down Window
The driver window has an
express-down feature. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front all
the way down and release, to
automatically lower.
To stop the window while it is
lowering, pull the front of the switch
momentarily. To raise the window,
pull and hold the front of the switch.
Express-Up Window
On windows with this feature, pull
the switch up to the second position
and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the
window as it is going up, pull up or
press down briefly on the switch
again.
Programming the Power
Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected,
or is not working, the driver
power window will need to be
re-programmed for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery
before reprogramming.
To program the driver window, follow
these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close all
doors.
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
If any object is in the path of the
window when the express‐up is
active, the window stops at the
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a
preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to
auto‐reverse. The window returns
to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
Express Window Anti‐Pinch
Override
{WARNING
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse
automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti‐pinch
feature can be overridden in a
supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second
position. The window rises for as
long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express
mode is re‐activated.
In this mode, the window can still
close on an object in its path. Use
care when using the override mode.
Window Lockout
The driver power window controls
also include a lockout button.
o(Window Lockout): Press the
lockout button to stop the rear
passengers from using their window
switches. The driver and front
passenger can still operate all the
windows with the lock on. When the
red part of the switch is visible, you
have returned to normal window
operation.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
Roof
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switch is located on the headliner
between the map lamps.
The sunroof only operates when the
ignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/
ACCESSORY, or if Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑20.
Press and release the back of the
switch to open the sunroof to the
vent position. From the vent
position, press and release the back
of the switch to express-open the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from
express opening, press the switch
again. If the sunshade is closed, it
will open automatically when the
sunroof opens past the vented
position.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19
A deflector will automatically raise
when the sunroof is opened. The
deflector will retract when the
sunroof is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front
of the switch and hold it until the
sunroof is closed. The sunroof will
stop if the switch is released. Close
the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel
may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly.
Always close the glass panel
before closing the sunshade.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the tracks that
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise or plug the water
drainage system. Periodically open
the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and
Restraints
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-37
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-57
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button located on top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The vehicle's front and rear seat
outboard head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-3
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
Seat Position
{WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat position:
1. Lift the bar under the front of the
seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure it is locked in
place.
Height Adjustment
If available, press and hold the top
or bottom of the switch to raise or
lower the seat. Release the switch
when the desired height is reached.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-4 Seats and Restraints
Power Seat Adjustment
{WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving.
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver seat
only when the vehicle is not
moving. To adjust a power seat, if available:
.Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.Raise or lower the front or rear
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
control up or down.
.Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire control up
or down.
Lumbar Adjustment
A. Increase Lumbar Support
Control
B. Decrease Lumbar Support
Control
If available, press the front (A) or
rear (B) of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support. Release
the control when the desired level of
support is reached.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-5
Reclining Seatbacks
{WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-6 Seats and Restraints
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-7
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
.Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Heated Front Seats
{WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
If available, press the top of the
switch to turn the heat feature on to
the high heat setting. The indicator
light “2”will be lit.
Press the top of the switch again to
go to the low heat setting. The
indicator light “1”will be lit.
Press the bottom of the switch to
turn the feature off.
The heated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned off.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-8 Seats and Restraints
Rear Seats
Folding the Seatback
Either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Adjust the seatback only when the
vehicle is not moving.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To fold the seatback down:
1. Make sure the front seatback is
not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down all
the way. If necessary, return the
front seatback to the upright
position. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
2. Pull up on the seatback strap
while folding the seatback down.
Raising the Seatback
{WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-9
{WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To raise the seatback:
1. Push the seatback up and back
to lock it into place.
2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
3. Make sure that the safety belts
are properly stowed over the
seatback in all three seating
positions.
When the seat is not in use, it
should be kept in the upright, locked
position.
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
{WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You and
your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
{WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
the vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑12 for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-10 Seats and Restraints
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Put someone on it.
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-11
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-12 Seats and Restraints
With safety belts, you slow down as
the vehicle does. You get more time
to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be —whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts —not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash —even
one that is not your fault —you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 mi) of home. And the
greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-13
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑39 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑41. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-14 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
{WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-15
{WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place
like this. In a crash, the belt would
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on
the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle the belt into the
buckle nearest you.
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-16 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the
belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-17
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-18 Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
{WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start
again.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the right front
seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑32 for more information.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-19
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑23.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash. See “Shoulder Belt
Height Adjuster”later in this
section for instruction on use
and important safety information.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-20 Seats and Restraints
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑13.
Squeeze the buttons (A) on the
sides of the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster to the
desired position.
After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into
position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side
crash.
Pretensioners work only once.
If they activate in a crash, they will
need to be replaced, and probably
other new parts for the vehicle's
safety belt system. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts After a
Crash on page 3‑24.
Black plate (21,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from
between the edge of the
seatback and the interior body to
remove the guide from its
storage clip.
2. Place the guide over the belt
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Black plate (22,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-22 Seats and Restraints
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the
safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
Black plate (23,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-23
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Pull the
guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto
the clip. Turn the guide and clip
inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body,
leaving only the loop of the elastic
cord exposed.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Black plate (24,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-24 Seats and Restraints
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑12 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑24.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
{WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
Black plate (25,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-25
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑13.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.A frontal airbag for the driver.
.A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
.A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
.A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
.A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Black plate (26,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-26 Seats and Restraints
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt —even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints”to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly —whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to any airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of the seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear a safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
{WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑39 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑41.
Black plate (27,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-27
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑13 for
more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver's frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger's frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger's side.
Black plate (28,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-28 Seats and Restraints
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
{WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Black plate (29,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-29
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed to
inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how
fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
example:
.If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
.If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
.If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
Airbag System on page 3‑25.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design.
Black plate (30,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-30 Seats and Restraints
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail
airbag is intended to deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of
what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For
seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbags modules in the
side of the front seatbacks closest
to the door. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑29 for more information.
Black plate (31,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-31
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑30.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
{WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
{WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Black plate (32,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-32 Seats and Restraints
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
.The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑17 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑18.
.Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.
United States
Canada and Mexico
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start, if equipped, to
start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system check.
When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑13.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
Black plate (33,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-33
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.”This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), no system is
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
fail-safe. No one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual
circumstance, even though
the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger airbag and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag if:
.The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
Black plate (34,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-34 Seats and Restraints
.The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
.The system determines that a
small child is present in a
booster seat.
.A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
.The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
.Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat‐
mounted side impact airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags are off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑13.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front
passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbags are active.
For some children who have
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag, depending upon the
person’s seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly —whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑13 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Black plate (35,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-35
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 3‑55 or Securing
Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑57.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit with
an infant present in a child
restraint, secure the child
restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and see your dealer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Black plate (36,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-36 Seats and Restraints
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts”and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑37 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
{WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
{WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Black plate (37,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-37
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag
system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger's
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system from
properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑32.
If you have any questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑1
or Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑3.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑1or
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑3.
Black plate (38,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-38 Seats and Restraints
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑13 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑30. See your
dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
{WARNING
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑13 for more information.
Black plate (39,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-39
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
.Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑18 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
.Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑18.
Black plate (40,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-40 Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
{WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Black plate (41,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-41
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Black plate (42,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-42 Seats and Restraints
{WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Black plate (43,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-43
{WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an
infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Black plate (44,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-44 Seats and Restraints
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 for
more information. Children can be
Black plate (45,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-45
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle —even when no child
is in it.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat
inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Black plate (46,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-46 Seats and Restraints
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.”This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑32 for additional
information.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Wherever you install a child
restraint, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle —even when no child
is in it.
Black plate (47,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-47
If you secure a child restraint in the
left or center rear seat using
LATCH, review the following
illustrations. Depending on where
you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain
safety belt assemblies or LATCH
anchors for additional passengers or
child restraints.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using LATCH
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
C. Child restraint using safety belt
or LATCH or occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
A. Child restraint or occupant
using safety belt
B. Child restraint using LATCH
Black plate (48,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-48 Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each LATCH
seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Black plate (49,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-49
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Rear Seat
i(Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j(Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Black plate (50,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-50 Seats and Restraints
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
The top tether anchors are located
under the covers, behind the rear
seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to
use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑45 for
additional information.
Black plate (51,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-51
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
{WARNING
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
{WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one
child restraint in the rear seat, see
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑45. Depending on where you
place the child restraint, you may
not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
for additional passengers or child
restraints.
Black plate (52,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-52 Seats and Restraints
You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
in the rear seat at the same time,
but you can install two of them.
If you want to do this, install one
LATCH child restraint in the
passenger-side position, and install
the other one either in the
driver-side position or in the center
position. Refer to the following
illustration to learn which anchors
to use.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat
Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower
Anchors
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower
Anchors
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
Black plate (53,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-53
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint , raise it.
See Head Restraints on
page 3‑2.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Black plate (54,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-54 Seats and Restraints
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether
route the tether under the
headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should be
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Black plate (55,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-55
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
{WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑48 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑48 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
Black plate (56,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-56 Seats and Restraints
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑45.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how. 3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Black plate (57,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-57
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑48 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑45.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑32 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑13 for
more information, including
important safety information.
Black plate (58,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-58 Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.”This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑32 for additional
information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑48 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Black plate (59,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Seats and Restraints 3-59
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑13.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Black plate (60,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
3-60 Seats and Restraints
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint ”under Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑32 for
more information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Storage 4-1
Storage
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3
Additional Storage Features
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Storage
Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage
An instrument panel storage area,
with a removable liner, is located
above the radio. Slide the latch
toward the rear of the vehicle to
open the storage area.
Glove Box
Pull the handle up to open.
Cupholders
Removable cupholders are located
in front of the center console. See
“Center Console Storage Area”to
access them. Press and hold the
tab at the rear of the cupholders and
lift up and rearward to remove the
cupholders. This disengages the
two forward tabs.
To reinstall, place the two forward
tabs into the slots and push down
on the rear of the cupholder.
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
4-2 Storage
For vehicles with rear seat
cupholders, access them by pulling
down on the door at the back of the
center console.
Front Storage
Storage is available in front of the
shift lever. Open it by pushing on
the bottom of the door.
A driver side storage compratment
is located near the steering column
on the bottom of the instrument
panel. Pull the cover down to open.
Pull out to remove for cleaning.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Storage 4-3
Center Console Storage
The center console storage has a
tray and a main storage area. Pull
up on the driver side latch to access
the tray. Pull up on the passenger
side latch to access the main
storage. It is equipped with a
removable divider and a storage
pocket may be at the rear of the
center console.
The armrest on top of the center
console can be adjusted to a
rearward, middle, and forward
position. Pull or push the front of the
armrest to adjust to the desired
position.
An additional storage area is in front
of the main storage. Push down and
then forward on the rear of the
cover to access. It has a storage
tray and removable cupholders.
Additional Storage
Features
Convenience Net
Use the rear convenience net, to
store small. The net should not be
used to store heavy loads.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
4-4 Storage
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-13
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-26
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-26
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-26
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-27
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-29
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-29
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-30
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-30
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
The lever is located on the left side
of the steering wheel column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
controls could differ depending on
the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
e+ / e−(Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the radio
volume.
w/xc(Next / Previous):
Press to change radio stations,
select tracks on a CD, or to select
tracks and navigate folders on an
iPod
®
or USB device.
To change radio stations:
.Press and release wor xc
to go to the next or previous
radio station stored as a preset.
.Press and hold wor xcto
go to the next or previous radio
station in the selected band with
a strong signal.
To select tracks on a CD:
Press and release wor xcto
go to the next or previous track.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-3
To select tracks on an iPod or USB
device:
1. Press and hold wor xc
while listening to a song until the
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display.
2. Press and release wor xc
to scroll up or down the list, then
press and hold wto play the
highlighted track.
To navigate folders on an iPod or
USB device:
1. Press and hold wor xc
while listening to a song until the
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display.
2. Press and hold xcto go
back to the previous folder list.
3. Press and release wor xc
to scroll up or down the list.
.To select a folder, press
and hold wwhen the folder
is highlighted.
.To go back further in the
folder list, press and
hold xc.
xc(End): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
bg(Mute / Voice Recognition):
Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth
®
or
OnStar
®
systems press and
hold bgfor longer than
two seconds to interact with
those systems. See Bluetooth on
page 7‑25 and the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Move the lever to control the
windshield wipers.
9(Off): Turns the windshield
wipers off.
&(Intermittent; Speed Sensitive
Wipers): For intermittent or speed
sensitive operation. While in this
position, turn the xband up or
down to vary frequency.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-4 Instruments and Controls
The amount of delay time varies
between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed
of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is
increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or
decreases.
6(Low Speed): Slow wipes.
1(High Speed): Fast wipes.
8(Mist): Single wipe, move the
lever down, then release it. Several
wipes, hold the lever down.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them.
If frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. Damaged
wiper blades should be replaced.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker stops
the motor until it cools. If the motor
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear
away the snow or ice, and then turn
the wipers back on.
As an added safety feature, if the
wipers are on for more than
15 seconds, the vehicle's
headlamps turn on automatically.
They turn off 15 seconds after the
wipers are turned off.
Windshield Washer
Press the button at the end of the
windshield wiper lever until the
washers begin.
{WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
When the button is released, the
washers stop, but the wipers
continue to wipe about three times
or resume the previous speed.
Compass
Compass Operation
Press Oon the rearview mirror to
turn the compass display on or off.
When the ignition and the compass
feature are on, the compass
displays the current compass
direction after a few seconds.
Compass Calibration
If after a few seconds the display
does not show a compass direction,
(N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, note pad
holder, or similar object. If the
letter C appears in the compass
window, the compass may need to
be reset or calibrated.
The mirror can be calibrated by
driving the vehicle very slowly, in
circles, until the display reads a
direction.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-5
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight. It is
necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if
the vehicle is driven outside
zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it is
necessary to adjust the compass
variance.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and
variance zone number on the
zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold Ountil a zone
number displays.
3. Once the zone number displays,
press Orepeatedly until the
correct zone number is reached.
If C appears in the compass
window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass
Calibration”listed previously.
Clock
Without Date Display
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single
CD Player
To set the time:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Press the Oknob to turn the
radio on.
2. Press the Hbutton until the hour
begins flashing on the display.
Press the Hbutton a second
time and the minute begins
flashing on the display.
3. While either the hour or the
minute numbers are flashing,
turn the fknob to increase or
decrease the time.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-6 Instruments and Controls
4. Press the Hbutton again until
the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed
time; otherwise, the flashing
stops after five seconds and the
current time displayed is
automatically set.
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour, press
the Hbutton until 12H or 24H is
displayed. Once 12H or 24H is
displayed, turn the fknob to the
desired option to select the setting.
Press the Hbutton again to apply
the setting, or let the screen
time out.
With Date Display
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB
Port, and Radio with Single CD
(MP3) Player
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Press the Oknob to turn the
radio on.
2. Press the Hbutton and the HR,
MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
3. Press the softkey located below
any one of the tabs that you
want to change.
4. To increase the time or date do
one of the following:
.Press the softkey located
below the selected tab.
.Press the ¨SEEK, or
\FWD button.
.Turn the fknob clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date do
one of the following:
.Press the ©SEEK or
sREV button.
.Turn the fknob
counterclockwise.
The date does not automatically
display. To see the date press H
while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the
normal radio and time display.
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press the Hbutton and then the
softkey located below the
forward arrow label. Once the
time 12H and 24H, and the date
MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and
year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
2. Press the softkey located below
the desired option.
3. Press the Hbutton again to
apply the selected default, or let
the screen time out.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-7
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are two accessory power
outlets. One accessory power outlet
is located inside the storage bin
below the climate controls and the
other outlet is on the rear of the
center storage console.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use. The
accessory power outlet is
operational at all times.
{WARNING
Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Certain electrical accessories may
not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with
the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑47.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current
The vehicle may have a power
outlet that can be used to plug in
electrical equipment that uses a
maximum limit of 150 watts.
The power outlet is located on the
rear of the center console.
An indicator light on the outlet
comes on when in use. The ignition
must be in ON/RUN and equipment
requiring less than 150 watts is
plugged into the outlet, and no
system fault is detected.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-8 Instruments and Controls
If you try to connect equipment
using more than 150 watts or a
system fault is detected, a
protection circuit shuts off the power
supply and the indicator light turns
off. To reset the circuit, unplug the
item and plug it back in or turn the
Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off
and then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑20. The power restarts when
equipment that operates within the
limit is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for
and may not work properly if the
following are plugged in:
.Equipment with high initial peak
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
.Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply
such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-9
Instrument Cluster
English shown, Metric similar
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-10 Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant
odometer. The digital odometer will
read 999,999 if it is turned back.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, it must be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it must
be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far
the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑22 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
Fuel Gauge
English
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-11
Metric
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge shows how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank. When the indicator
nears empty, a message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑27 for more
information. The vehicle still has a
little fuel left, but the vehicle should
be fueled soon. An arrow on the fuel
gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. These are
normal and do not indicate a
problem with the fuel gauge:
.At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
fuel tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less
than half the fuel tank's capacity
to fill it.
.The indicator moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
.The gauge goes back to empty
when the ignition is turned off.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
English
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-12 Instruments and Controls
Metric
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the pointer
moves towards the H (United
States) or to the shaded thermostat
symbol area (Canada), the engine is
too hot.
A temperature indicator light turns
on and a chime sounds.
The vehicle is operated under
normal driving conditions and the
temperature indicator light comes
on, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
When the vehicle is started,
this light flashes and a chime may
come on to remind the driver to
fasten their safety belt. Then the
light stays on solid until the belt is
buckled. This cycle may continue
several times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
If the driver safety belt is buckled,
neither the light nor the chime
comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the
passenger safety belt reminder light,
several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety
belt. The passenger safety belt light
flashes and then stays on solid until
the belt is buckled. This cycle
continues several times if the
passenger remains or becomes
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-13
The front passenger safety belt
reminder light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop, or other
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's
electrical system for possible
malfunctions. If the light stays on it
indicates there is an electrical
problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
see Airbag System on page 3‑25.
The airbag readiness light flashes
for a few seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed immediately.
{WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See Airbag System
Messages on page 5‑29 for more
information.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑32 for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-14 Instruments and Controls
United States
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not
see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side
impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
{WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑13 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-15
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to START, but
the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
The light should go out once the
engine starts. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the
charging system. This light could
indicate that there are problems with
a generator drive belt, or that there
is an electrical problem. Have it
checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
This light should come on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-16 Instruments and Controls
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
.Reduce vehicle speed.
.Avoid hard accelerations.
.Avoid steep uphill grades.
.If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
The following may correct an
emissions system malfunction:
.Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑39. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
.Make sure the electrical system
is not wet. The system could be
wet if the vehicle was driven
through a deep puddle of water.
The condition is usually
corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
.Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑35.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-17
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs to
inspect the on-vehicle emission
control equipment. For the
inspection, the emission system test
equipment is connected to the
vehicle’s Data Link
Connector (DLC).
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
.The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off.
.The critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if the
battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission
control systems during normal
driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-18 Instruments and Controls
Brake System Warning
Light
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
English Metric
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light also comes on
when the parking brake is set. The
light stays on if the parking brake
does not fully release. If it stays on
after the parking brake is fully
released, it means there is a brake
problem.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
may display a BRAKE FLUID
message. See Brake System
Messages on page 5‑26 for more
information.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and carefully stop.
The brake pedal may be harder to
push or the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Try turning off and restarting the
vehicle one or two times, if the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑88
{WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-19
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑18.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Brake
System Messages on page 5‑26 for
all brake related DIC messages.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the Traction
Control System (TCS) indicator/
warning light comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
If the system is working normally the
indicator light turns off.
If the light is on while certain DIC
messages display, this indicates
that the ESC and TCS are not
working or are disabled.
If the light is on and not flashing,
the TCS and potentially the ESC
system have been disabled. Check
the DIC messaging to determine
which feature(s) is no longer
functioning and whether it is
because of the driver turning off the
feature(s), or because the system is
not working properly and the vehicle
requires service.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is
not limited. If the ESC system is
disabled, the system does not aid in
maintaining directional control of the
vehicle.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-20 Instruments and Controls
If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS or the ESC
system is actively working. Check
the DIC messaging for details to
determine which system is working.
If the LOW TRACTION message
appears, the system is limiting
wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is
aiding in maintaining directional
control of the vehicle.
See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 9‑31 and Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑29
for more information.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑27 for more information
on the messages associated with
this light.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This light comes on briefly while
starting the vehicle.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by the dealer. If the system
is working normally the indicator
light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the engine
coolant temperature warning light
on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑20. The vehicle's
engine could be damaged, and it
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature
warning light on.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑20
for more information.
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
Black plate (21,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-21
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑29 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑51 for
more information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the TPMS. The light
flashes for about a minute and stays
on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑54 for more
information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Black plate (22,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-22 Instruments and Controls
Security Light
For information regarding this light
and the vehicle's security system,
see Content Theft Deterrent.
High-Beam On Light
The high-beam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2for more
information.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light comes on
whenever the cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32 for more
information.
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC). The DIC
display gives you the status of many
of your vehicle's systems. The DIC
is also used to display driver
personalization menu modes and
warning/status messages. All
messages will appear in the DIC
display, located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster.
Black plate (23,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-23
The DIC buttons are located on the
left side of the steering wheel.
INFO (Information): Press this
button to scroll through the vehicle
information mode displays.
r(Reset): Press this button to
reset some vehicle information
mode displays, select a
personalization menu mode
setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
Press and hold the information and
reset buttons at the same time for
one second, then release the
buttons to enter the personalization
menu. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑30 for more information.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. The DIC has different modes
which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button
functions are detailed in the
following.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this
button to scroll through the following
vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature
The outside air temperature will be
displayed at the same time as the
Odometer and the Trip Odometer.
The temperature outside of the
vehicle will be displayed in either
degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F). The outside air
temperature appears on the left side
of the DIC display and the
odometer, or trip odometer, appears
on the right side of the display.
Odometer
Press the information button until
the outside air temperature and the
odometer displays. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle
has been driven in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
To change the DIC display to
English or metric units, see “UNITS”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑30.
Trip Odometer
Press the information button until
the outside air temperature along
with A or B displays. These modes
show the current distance traveled
since the last reset for each trip
odometer in either kilometers (km)
or miles (mi). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
To reset the trip odometer to zero,
press and hold the reset button for a
few seconds while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
Black plate (24,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-24 Instruments and Controls
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until
FUEL RANGE displays. This mode
shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). It is
based on fuel economy and the fuel
remaining in the tank.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL
RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to
determine fuel range is an average
of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data
is gradually updated. The FUEL
RANGE mode cannot be reset.
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG displays. This
mode shows how many liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
per gallon (mpg) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past
driving conditions.
To reset the average fuel economy,
press and hold the reset button
while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is
displayed. Average fuel economy is
then calculated starting from that
point. If the average fuel economy is
not reset, it is continually updated
each time you drive.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST
(Instantaneous)
Press the information button until
MPG (L/100 KM) INST displays. This
mode shows the current fuel
economy at a particular moment
and changes frequently as driving
conditions change. This mode
shows the instantaneous fuel
economy in liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). Unlike average fuel
economy, this screen cannot be
reset.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until
AV SPEED displays. This mode
shows the vehicle's average speed
in kilometers per hour (km/h) or
miles per hour (mph).
To reset the average vehicle speed,
press and hold the reset button
while AV SPEED is displayed.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until
OIL LIFE displays. The engine oil
life system shows an estimate of the
oil's remaining useful life. It shows
100% when the system is reset after
an oil change. It alerts you to
change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving
conditions.
Black plate (25,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-25
In addition to the engine oil life
system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9and
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
Always reset the engine oil life
system after an oil change. See
“How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System”under Engine Oil Life
System on page 10‑13.
Tire Pressure
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the
pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure is
shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or
pounds per square inch (psi). Press
the information button until
LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the
information button again until
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for
the rear tires.
If a low tire pressure condition is
detected by the system while
driving, a message advising you to
add air will appear in the display.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑51
and Tire Messages on page 5‑29 for
more information.
Vehicle Messages
The following messages appear if
there is a problem detected in one
of your vehicle's systems.
A message clears when the
vehicle's condition is no longer
present. To acknowledge a
message and clear it from the
display, press and hold any of the
DIC buttons. If the condition is still
present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the
vehicle is turned off and back on.
With most messages, a warning
chime sounds when the message
displays. Your vehicle may have
other warning messages.
Black plate (26,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-26 Instruments and Controls
Brake System Messages
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the
ignition is on, when the brake fluid
level is low. The brake system
warning light on the instrument
panel cluster also comes on. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑18 for more information.
Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer as soon as possible.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking
brake is left engaged. See Parking
Brake on page 9‑28 for more
information.
Cruise Control Messages
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message displays when the
cruise control system is active. See
Cruise Control on page 9‑32 for
more information.
Door Ajar Messages
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or
more of the vehicle's doors are not
closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the
trunk is not closed completely. Make
sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 2‑9
for more information.
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the life
of the engine oil has expired and it
should be changed.
When this message is
acknowledged and cleared from the
display, the engine oil life system
must still be reset separately. See
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13,Engine Oil on
page 10‑9, and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2for more
information.
Engine Power Messages
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power)
REDUCED
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Black plate (27,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-27
Fuel System Messages
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel
cap has not been fully tightened.
Recheck the fuel cap to make sure
that it is on properly. A few driving
trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the message off.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 5‑10,Fuel on
page 9‑35, and Filling the Tank on
page 9‑39 for more information.
Key and Lock Messages
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. Replace
the battery in the transmitter. See
“Battery Replacement”under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Lamp Messages
AUTO (Automatic)
LIGHTS OFF
This message displays if the
automatic headlamp system is
disabled with the headlamp switch.
See Automatic Headlamp System
on page 6‑3for more information.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
This message displays if the
automatic headlamp system is
enabled with the headlamp switch.
See Automatic Headlamp System
on page 6‑3for more information.
Ride Control System
Messages
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), this
message displays and the ESC/TCS
light on the instrument panel cluster
flashes when ESC is assisting you
with directional control of the
vehicle. You may feel or hear the
system working and see this
message displayed in the DIC.
Slippery road conditions may exist
when this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. This
message may stay on for a
few seconds after ESC stops
assisting you with directional control
of the vehicle. This is normal when
the system is operating. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 5‑19 for more
information.
Black plate (28,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-28 Instruments and Controls
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) OFF
If your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), this
message displays and the ESC/TCS
light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on solid when ESC is turned
off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) on page 9‑31 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator/
Warning Light on page 5‑19 for
more information.
LOW TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction
Control System (TCS), this
message displays and the ESC/TCS
light on the instrument panel cluster
flashes when the system is actively
limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message stays on
for a few seconds after the system
stops limiting wheel spin. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑29 and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Light on page 5‑19 for more
information.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC
STABILITY CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), this
message displays and a chime
sounds if there has been a problem
detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. This light stays on
solid as long as the detected
problem remains present. When this
message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) on page 9‑31 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on
page 5‑19 for more information.
If this message turns on while you
are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the
ignition off and then back on. If this
message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. Have the
ESC inspected by your dealer as
soon as possible.
SERVICE TRACTION
If your vehicle has the Traction
Control System (TCS), this
message displays and a chime
sounds when the system is not
functioning properly. The ESC/TCS
light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. This light stays on
solid as long as the detected
problem remains present. When this
message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑29 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on
page 5‑19 for more information.
Have the system serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Black plate (29,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-29
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction
Control System (TCS), this
message displays and the ESC/TCS
light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on solid when the system is
turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑29 and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light on
page 5‑19 for more information.
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there
is a problem with the airbag system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately.
Service Vehicle Messages
ENGINE DISABLED
This message displays if the starting
of the engine is disabled. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING
On some vehicles, this message
displays if a problem has been
detected with the electric power
steering. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately.
Tire Messages
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays if a part on the
TPMS is not working properly. The
tire pressure light also flashes and
then remains on during the same
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 5‑20. Several
conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑54 for
more information. If the warning
comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TPMS. See
your dealer.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low on air. The low
tire pressure warning light also
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 5‑20. If this message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 10‑42,Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12, and Tire
Pressure on page 10‑51. The DIC
also shows the tire pressure values.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑22.
Black plate (30,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-30 Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the
outside air temperature is cold
enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Washer Fluid Messages
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the
vehicle's windshield washer fluid is
low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon
as possible. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑23.
Vehicle
Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization
capabilities that allow you to
program certain features to a
preferred setting. All of the features
listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available
will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the features
were set when your vehicle left the
factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since
that time.
To change feature settings, use the
following procedure:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the
vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information
and reset buttons at the same
time for one second, then
release to enter the
personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater
than 3 km/h (2 mph), only the
UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to
scroll through the available
personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll
through the available settings for
each mode.
If you do not make a selection
within ten seconds, the display
will go back to the previous
information displayed.
Black plate (31,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-31
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
When this feature is displayed, you
can reset the engine oil life system.
To reset the system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑13. See
“OIL LIFE”under Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑22 for more
information.
UNITS
This feature allows you to select the
units of measurement in which
the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears
on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available
settings:
ENGLISH (default in United
States): All information will be
displayed in English units.
METRIC (default in Canada): All
information will be displayed in
metric units.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this
feature allows remote start to be
turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside
of the vehicle using your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
When REMOTE START appears on
the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will
be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start
feature will be enabled.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5for more information.
To select a setting and move on to
the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the
vehicle's horn to chirp every time
the lock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LOCK HORN
appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not
chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter. The
horn will still chirp on the second
press.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first
press of the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3for
more information.
To select a setting and move on to
the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Black plate (32,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-32 Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the
vehicle's horn to chirp on the first
press of the unlock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, can be enabled or
disabled. When UNLOCK HORN
appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the
available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not
chirp when the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter is pressed.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first
press of the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3for
more information.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHT FLASH
This feature, which allows the
vehicle's exterior hazard/turn signal
lighting to flash every time the lock,
unlock, or trunk release buttons on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter are pressed, can be
enabled or disabled. When LIGHT
FLASH appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for
at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn
signal lighting will not flash when
the lock, unlock, or trunk release
buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/
turn signal lighting will flash when
the lock, unlock, or trunk release
buttons on the RKE transmitter are
pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3for
more information.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which delays the
actual locking of the vehicle, can be
enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last
door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by
pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter a
second time.
Black plate (33,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Instruments and Controls 5-33
OFF: The doors will lock
immediately when pressing the
power lock switch or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7,
Delayed Locking on page 2‑8, and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3for
more information.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the
vehicle to automatically unlock
certain doors, can be enabled or
disabled. When AUTO UNLK
appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will
automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver's door will
automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will
automatically unlock. You will need
to manually unlock the doors.
See Automatic Door Locks on
page 2‑8for more information.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
UNLK (Unlock)
This screen displays only if DRIVER
or ALL is selected for the AUTO
UNLK feature. This feature
determines when the automatic door
unlocking will occur. When UNLK
appears on the display, press and
hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the
available settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock
when the key is turned off.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The
door(s) will unlock when the vehicle
is shifted into P (Park).
See Automatic Door Locks on
page 2‑8for more information.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
This feature, which allows the
vehicle's exterior perimeter lighting
to turn on each time the unlock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be
enabled or disabled. When EXT
LIGHTS appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for
at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
OFF: The exterior perimeter
lighting will not turn on when the
unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
Black plate (34,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
5-34 Instruments and Controls
ON (default): The exterior
perimeter lighting will turn on when
the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is pressed.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3for
more information.
To select a setting and move
on to the next feature, press the
information button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the
language in which the DIC will
display. When LANGUAGE appears
on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available
settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear
in French.
SPANISH: All messages will
appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will
appear in German.
To select a setting and exit out of
the personalization menu mode,
press the information button while
the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be
exited when any of the following
conditions occur:
.A ten second time period has
elapsed.
.The ignition is turned off.
.The end of the personalization
menu list is reached.
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Lighting 6-1
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps .................... 6-4
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The band on the lever located on
the left side of the steering column,
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the
following four positions:
2(Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps.
;(Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp
System): Automatically turns on
the Daytime Running Lamps during
daytime, and the headlamps,
parking lamps, and taillamps at
night.
P(Off/On): Turn the band to this
position to turn on the Automatic
Headlamp System. In Canada, this
position only works when a vehicle
is in the P (Park) position.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp
System, turn the switch to off/on. To
turn them off, turn the switch to off/
on again. This is a momentary
control switch that springs back
when released. The Automatic
Headlamp System always turns on
at the beginning of an ignition cycle.
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
If the drivers door is opened and the
ignition is turned off while leaving
the lamps on, a warning chime will
sound.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low
beam to high beam, push the turn
signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
This instrument panel cluster light
3comes on if the high beam
lamps are turned on while the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high
beam to low beam, pull the turn
signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets the high-beam
headlamps be used to signal a
driver in front of you that you want
to pass.
Pull the turn signal/multifunction
lever toward you until the high-beam
headlamps come on, then release
the lever to turn them off.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional DRL are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada. The
vehicle has a light sensor on top of
the instrument panel that controls
the DRL. Do not cover this sensor
or the head lamps will be on when
they are not needed.
The DRL system makes the
low-beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness when the
following conditions are met:
.The ignition is on.
.The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
.The exterior lamps control is in
the parking lamps only position
(This applies only to vehicles
that are first sold in Canada).
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Lighting 6-3
.The light sensor detects daytime
light.
.The parking brake is released or
the vehicle is not in P (Park).
When the DRL system is on, the
taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
parking lamps, and instrument panel
lights are not on unless you turn the
exterior lamps control to the parking
lamp position.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when they are
needed.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside, the
automatic headlamp system turns
on the headlamps at the normal
brightness along with other lamps
such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will
also be dim.
The vehicle has a light sensor on
top of the instrument panel that
controls the automatic headlamp
system. Do not cover the sensor or
the automatic headlamp system will
turn on when it is not needed.
There is a delay in the transition
between the daytime and nighttime
operation of the DRL and the
automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright
overhead street lights does not
affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp systems will
only be affected when the light
sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than this delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
it takes about one minute for the
automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside.
During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument
panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See Instrument
Panel Illumination Control on
page 6‑5.
To idle the vehicle with the
automatic headlamp system off, turn
the ignition on and set the exterior
light switch to the off/on position.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the transmission must stay in
P (Park) for this function.
The regular headlamps should be
used when needed.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature
keeps the headlamps on for
20 seconds after the key is turned to
LOCK/OFF, then the headlamps
automatically turn off.
To override the 20 second delayed
headlamp feature while it is active
turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back
to AUTO.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
6-4 Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers
|(Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press this button located on the
instrument panel, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on
and off. This warns others that you
are having trouble.
Press |again to turn the
flashers off.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Release the lever and the
turn signal automatically flashes
three times. If more flashes are
desired, continue to hold the lever.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
If a turn signal arrow flashes rapidly
or does not come on, a signal bulb
may need to be replaced. See
Fuses on page 10‑35.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
button for this feature is located on
the instrument panel, to the left of
the steering wheel.
The ignition must be on for the fog
lamps to work.
#:Press to turn the fog lamps on
or off. An indicator light comes on
when the fog lamps are on.
The parking lamps automatically
turn on and off when the fog lamps
are turned on and off.
The fog lamps turn off while the
high-beam headlamps are
turned on.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The knob for this control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering column.
D(Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights. Turn the
knob completely clockwise to turn
on the interior lamps.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any
door is opened. They turn off after
all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned
on by turning the instrument panel
brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering column, clockwise to the
farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a
door is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with front and rear
reading lamps, press the lens to
turn the lamp on and off, while the
doors are closed. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
Lighting Features
Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come
on when any door is opened. These
lamps fade out about 20 seconds
after all of the doors have been
closed or when the ignition is turned
to ON/RUN. They also come on
when the unlock symbol button or
the horn symbol is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on
for about 20 seconds after the key is
removed from the ignition to provide
light as you exit.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
6-6 Lighting
Parade Dimming
Parade dimming is a separate
lighting mode that comes on while
the parking lamps are turned on
during the day. It prevents the
display lights and indicator lights
from being dim, while the parking
lamps are used during the day.
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays, it
is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑22.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Lighting 6-7
Battery Power Protection
The vehicle has a battery run-down
protection feature designed to
protect the vehicle's battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk,
reading, or visor vanity) is left on
while the ignition is turned off, the
battery run-down protection system
will automatically shut the lamp(s)
off after 20 minutes. This will avoid
draining the battery.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do
one of the following:
.Turn on the ignition.
.Turn the exterior lamp control off
and then on.
.Open a door.
.Press any Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter button
(if equipped).
.Press the remote trunk release
button.
.Press the power door lock
switch.
The battery run-down feature will
also be activated when any door on
the vehicle is left open and the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
6-8 Lighting
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment
System
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-15
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Introduction
Infotainment
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to
become familiar with its features.
{WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death
to you or others. Do not give
extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Notice: The chime signals related
to safety belts, parking brake, and
other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/
entertainment system. If that
equipment is replaced or
additional equipment is added to
your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement
or additional equipment is
compatible with your vehicle
before installing it. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑20 for more
information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock
®
is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-3
Operation
Radio with CD (Base)
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-4 Infotainment System
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio with CD (MP3) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios
as its infotainment system.
Softkeys
The Radio with CD (MP3) and USB
Port, and the Radio with CD (MP3)
have five softkeys located below the
radio display. Softkeys are used to
control functions that appear on the
radio display as tabs directly above
the softkeys.
Using the Radio
O(Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
(Information): Press to switch the
display between the radio station
frequency and the time. While the
ignition is off, press this button to
display the time.
Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): Radios with the Speed
Compensated Volume (SCV) feature
automatically adjust the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
2. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio
display.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-5
4. Press the softkey under the
desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of
radio volume compensation.
The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more
radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Radio with CD
To adjust the bass, or treble:
1. Press the fknob until Bass or
Treble displays.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
the following:
.Turn the fknob.
.Press either ¨SEEK, or
©SEEK button.
.Press either \FWD, or
sREV button.
EQ (Equalization): Press this
button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
Setting the Tone (Bass/
Midrange/Treble) Radio with
CD (MP3) and USB Port, Radio
with CD (MP3)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble:
1. Press the fknob until the tone
control tabs display.
2. Highlight the desired tone
control tab by doing one of the
following:
.Pressing the fknob.
.Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following:
.Turn the fknob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
.Press the ¨SEEK, or
©SEEK button.
.Press the \FWD, or
sREV button.
If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
more than 2 seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
position, press the fknob for more
than 2 seconds until a beep sounds.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-6 Infotainment System
EQ (Equalization): Press this
button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
If the radio has a Bose
®
audio
system, the EQ settings are either
MANUAL or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD
To adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press the `or press the f
knob until the speaker control
label displays.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
the following:
.Turn the fknob.
.Press either ¨SEEK, or
©SEEK button.
.Press either \FWD, or
sREV button.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD
(MP3) and USB Port, Radio
with CD (MP3)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press the fknob until the
speaker control tabs display.
2. Highlight the desired speaker
control tab by doing one of the
following:
.Pressing the fknob.
.Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following:
.Turn the fknob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
.Press the ¨SEEK, or
©SEEK button.
.Press the \FWD, or
sREV button.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
press the fknob for more than
2 seconds.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
and mutes the rear speakers.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-7
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: Displays if the
radio is no longer calibrated
properly for the vehicle. The vehicle
must be returned to your dealer for
service.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the
TheftLock
®
system has activated.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when
the information is available. While
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
4(Information) (RDS Features):
For vehicles with RDS features,
press 4to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS station. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO”displays.
Auto Text (RDS Features): If
additional information is available
for the current song being played,
Auto Text will automatically page/
scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV
presets on the radio display. By
default, Auto Text is enabled.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
TXT tab on the radio display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON
or OFF tab on the radio display.
If 4is pressed and the song title or
artist information is longer than what
can be displayed, the extra
information will page every
three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-8 Infotainment System
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM™
(if equipped) on the Radio with CD
(Base). Press to choose between
FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port,
or the Radio with CD (MP3).
f(Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
©SEEK: Press to seek or scan
stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
.To seek stations, press and
release ©SEEK to go to the
previous station and stay there.
.To scan stations, press and hold
©SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press ©SEEK
again to stop scanning.
.To scan preset stations in the
selected band, press and hold
©SEEK for four seconds until a
double beep sounds. The radio
goes to a stored preset, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to
the next stored preset. Press
©SEEK again to stop scanning
preset stations.
¨SEEK: Press to seek or scan
stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
.To seek stations, press and
release ¨SEEK to go to the
next station and stay there.
.To scan stations, press and hold
¨SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press ¨SEEK
again to stop scanning.
.To scan preset stations in the
selected band, press and hold
¨SEEK for four seconds until a
double beep sounds. The radio
goes to a stored preset, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the
next stored preset. Press
¨SEEK again to stop scanning
preset stations.
Storing Radio Stations
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is
parked, see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-9
Radios that have a FAV button store
radio stations as favorites, up to
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the 6 softkeys below
the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the FAV button. Press the
FAV button to go through up to
6 pages of favorites, each having
6 favorite stations available per
page. Each page of favorites can
contain any combination of AM, FM,
or XM, if equipped, stations.
Radios that do not have a FAV
button store radio stations as
presets, up to 18 stations
(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can be
programmed on the 6 numbered
pushbuttons.
Storing a Radio Station as a
Preset
Radios that have numbered
pushbuttons store radio stations as
presets.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered buttons.
To store preset stations:
1. Tune to a radio station.
2. Press and hold one of the
6 numbered pushbuttons for
3 seconds until a beep sounds.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store
additional radio stations.
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite
Radio that have a FAV button store
radio stations as favorites.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to a radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
The number of favorites pages can
be setup using the MENU button. To
setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the number of favorites
pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming
favorites.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-10 Infotainment System
Satellite Radio
XM™Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required to
receive the XM service. If XM
Service needs to be reactivated, the
radio will display "No Subscription
Please Renew" on channel XM1.
For more information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
4(Information) (XM Satellite Radio
Service): For vehicles with XM,
press 4to display additional text
information related to the current
XM channel. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO”displays.
Auto Text (Satellite Radio
Service): If additional information is
available for the current song being
played, Auto Text will automatically
page/scroll the information every
three seconds above the FAV
presets on the radio display. By
default, Auto Text is enabled.
To change the Auto Text setting:
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO
TXT tab on the radio display.
3. Press the softkey under the ON
or OFF tab on the radio display.
If 4is pressed and the song title or
artist information is longer than
what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every
three seconds when Auto Text is
activated.
Finding an XM Channel
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
f(Tune): Turn to manually select
an XM channel.
©SEEK: Press to go to the
previous XM channel.
.To scan stations, press and hold
©SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a cahnnel, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press ©SEEK
again to stop scanning.
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-11
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next
XM channel.
.To scan stations, press and hold
¨SEEK for a few seconds until
the radio beeps once. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press ¨SEEK
again to stop scanning.
sREV: Press to go to the
previous XM category.
\FWD: Press to go to the next
XM category.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Channel
To find XM channels in a category:
1. Press the CAT button to display
the category tabs. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
.Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the
category list by pressing the
\FWD or the sREV
button.
2. Press either of the two softkeys
below the desired category tab
to immediately tune to the first
XM station in that category.
To go to the previous or next XM
station in the selected category,
do one of the following:
.Turn the fknob.
.Press the softkey below the
right or left arrows in the
category tab.
.Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK.
3. To exit the category search
mode, press the FAV button or
BAND button to display the
favorites again.
Adding and Removing Categories
Categories cannot be added or
removed while the vehicle is moving
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
To add or remove a category:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the fknob to display the
category you want to add or
remove.
4. Press the softkey located under
the Add or Remove tab.
To restore all removed
categories, press the softkey
under the Restore All tab.
5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-12 Infotainment System
Storing XM Channels
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is
parked, see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Up to 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the
6 softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the
FAV button. Press the FAV button to
go through up to 6 pages of
favorites, each having 6 favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM,
if equipped, stations.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to an XM channel.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
The number of favorites pages can
be setup using the MENU button. To
setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the number of favorites
pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming
favorites.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking the
XM™signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-13
Channel Unauth : This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
No Subscription Please Renew:
XM subscription needs to be
reactivated. Contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM™Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver or antenna
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer.
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-14 Infotainment System
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
XM™Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from coast to
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference can cause an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-15
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio
reception, the antenna connector
needs to be properly attached to the
post on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between the
grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside
rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Satellite Radio Antenna
For vehicles with XM satellite radio
service, the antenna is located on
the roof of the vehicle. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
Audio Players
CD Player
Some CD players can play MP3
CD-R or CD-RW discs, see “MP3”
later in this section for more
information.
The CD player can play the smaller
8 cm (3 in) single discs with an
adapter ring.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a disc, it could
get caught in the CD player. Use a
marking pen to write on the top of
the disc if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
could damage the CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label,
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-16 Infotainment System
load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages”later in this section.
Care of CDs
Store a disc in its original case or a
protective case and away from
direct sunlight and dust. If the
bottom of a disc is damaged it may
not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom of a disc while
handling it, pick it up by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a disc is dirty, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Inserting a Disc
Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in
and the disc begins playing.
Use an adapter ring when playing
the smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs.
Smaller discs with the adapter ring
are loaded the same way as a
full-size disc.
Ejecting a Disc
ZEJECT: Press to eject the disc.
If the disc is not removed after
several seconds, the CD player
automatically pulls the disc back in.
Playing a CD
When a CD is inserted into the
player the CD symbol displays, and
as each new track starts to play the
track number displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
when a CD is in the player, the CD
stays in the player. If the ignition or
radio is turned on when a CD is in
the player, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
Buttons and Knobs
The buttons and knobs on the radio
control the following features.
f(Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press and
hold or press multiple times to
continue moving backward through
the tracks on the CD.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through the tracks on
the CD.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-17
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
track displays. Release to resume
playing the track.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.
4(Information): Press to display
available additional information
about the current track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD
remains inside the CD player.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD while listening to the
radio or a portable audio device.
Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for
an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No
Aux Input Device Found may
display.
Softkeys
The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control functions
that display as tabs.
The softkeys below the radio display
control the following features.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be
listened to in random, rather than
sequential order.
To use random:
1. Press the softkey below RDM
tab until Random Current Disc
displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play.
MP3 Supported Files
The Radio with CD (MP3), Radio
with USB and CD (MP3), have the
capability of playing an MP3 CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
The radio can also play discs that
contain both uncompressed CD
audio and MP3 files. When a disc
contains both types of audio, the CD
player reads all MP3 files first, then
the uncompressed CD audio files.
Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
.Up to 50 folders.
.Up to 8 folders in depth.
.Up to 50 playlists.
.Up to 255 files.
.Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.Files with an .mp3 or .cda file
extension.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-18 Infotainment System
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage
device does not contain folders.
Files accessed from the root
directory of a disc display as
F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
File Naming
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the file extension as the track name.
Track names longer than
32 characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not
show parts of words on the last
page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
Playlists
Discs that have playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however,
there is no playlist editing capability
using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following
order:
.Play begins from the first track in
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
.Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first folder.
When playback starts from a new
folder, the new track name displays
unless folder mode has been
chosen as the default display, then
the new folder name displays.
Buttons and Knobs
The buttons and knobs on the radio
control the following features.
f(Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
on the disc.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue
moving backward through tracks.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-19
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume and
the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release sREV to
resume playing.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
track displays. Release \FWD to
resume playing.
4(Information): Press to display
available additional information
about the current track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while an MP3 disc is playing. The
MP3 disc remains inside the CD
player.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play an MP3 disc while listening to
the radio or a portable audio device.
Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for
an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, No
Aux Input Device Found may
display.
Softkeys
The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control functions
that display as tabs.
The softkeys below the radio display
control the following features.
Sc(Previous Folder): Press
the softkey below Scto go to the
first track in the previous folder.
cT(Next Folder): Press the
softkey below cTto go to the first
track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): MP3 files can be
listened to on a CD in random,
rather than sequential order. To use
random:
1. Press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays to play songs from
the current CD in random order.
2. Press the same softkey again to
turn off random play.
h(Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below hto have the files
played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the
files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
The radio may begin playing while it
is scanning in the background.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-20 Infotainment System
When the scan is finished, the disc
begins playing files in order by
artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist,
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes to
the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.
To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below
the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the album tab from the sort
screen.
3. Press the softkey below the
back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs from
that album have played, the player
moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the disc and
begins playing MP3 files from that
album.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
CD Player Messages
CHECK DISC: If an error message
displays and/or the disc comes out,
it could be for one of the following
reasons:
.The CD player is very hot. When
the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
.The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.
.The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
.The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
.A problem may have occurred
while burning the disc.
.The label could be caught in the
CD player.
If the disc is not playing correctly for
any other reason, try a known
good disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it
down and provide it to your dealer
when reporting the problem.
Auxiliary Devices
This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and a
USB port, located on the audio
faceplate. Some portable audio
devices such as iPods
®
, MP3
players, and USB storage devices
can be connected to the vehicle
using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a
USB cable.
Black plate (21,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-21
Drivers are encouraged to set up
any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2for
more information on driver
distraction.
Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system may have a
3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right or left side
of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone
set into the front auxiliary input jack.
An external audio device such as an
iPod
®
, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as
another audio source.
To use a portable audio player,
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack. When a
device is connected, press the CD/
AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the vehicle
speakers.
O(Power/Volume): Turn to adjust
the volume. Additional volume
adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the
volume is too quiet or not loud.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is
connected to the auxiliary input. The
portable audio device continues
playing until it is stopped or
turned off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD while a portable audio
device is connected to the auxiliary
input. Press again and the system
begins playing audio from the
connected portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not
connected, No Aux Input Device
may display.
Using the USB Port
The radio may have a USB port
located on the lower right side of the
faceplate. Radios that have a USB
port can play .mp3 and .wma files
that are stored on a USB storage
device as well as tracks that are
stored on an iPod
®
.
USB Supported File and Folder
Structure
The radio supports:
.Up to 700 folders.
.Up to 8 folders in depth.
.Up to 65,535 files.
.Folder and file names up to
64 bytes.
.Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
extension.
.AAC files stored on an iPod.
.FAT16
.FAT32
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage
device does not contain folders.
Black plate (22,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-22 Infotainment System
Files accessed from the root
directory of a USB device display as
F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
File Naming
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the file extension as the track name.
Track names longer than 32
characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not
show parts of words on the last
page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following
order:
.Play begins from the first track in
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
.Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the
display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
the default display. The new track
name displays.
Connecting a USB Storage
Device or iPod
The radio buttons, knobs and
softkeys are used to control a USB
storage device or an iPod when it is
connected to the USB port.
To connect a USB storage device,
connect the device to the USB port
located on the front of the radio.
To connect an iPod, connect one
end of the USB cable that came
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other
end to the USB port located on the
front of the radio. If the vehicle is on
and the USB connection works, “OK
to disconnect”and a GM logo may
appear on the iPod and iPod
appears on the radio's display.
The iPod charges while it is
connected to the USB port if the
ingition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position. When the
ignition is turned OFF, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not
charge or draw power from the
vehicle's battery.
Black plate (23,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-23
Older iPod's that are not supported
can still be used by connecting it to
the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input
jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable.
Using a USB Storage Device
or iPod
The buttons and knobs on the radio
and the softkeys below the radio
display are used to control a USB
storage device or an iPod.
Buttons and Knobs
The buttons and knobs on the radio
control the following features.
f(Tune): Turn to select files.
©SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press and hold ©
SEEK or press it multiple times to
continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold ¨SEEK or
press it multiple times to continue
moving forward through tracks.
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume.
Release sREV to resume playing.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release \FWD to
resume playing.
4(Information): Press to display
additional information about the
selected track.
Softkeys
The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control functions
that display as tabs.
To use the softkeys, press a softkey
below any tab that is displayed, or if
no tabs are displayed, press the first
or last softkey below the radio
display to display the tabs.
The softkeys below the radio display
control the following features.
j(Pause): Press the softkey below
jto pause the track. The tab
appears raised when pause is being
used. Press the softkey below j
again to resume playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the
back tab to go back to the main
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
device.
c(Folder View): Press the
softkey below cto view the
contents of the current folder on the
USB drive.
To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below c.
2. Turn fto scroll through the list
of folders.
3. Press fto select the desired
folder. If there is more then one
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
Black plate (24,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-24 Infotainment System
4. Turn fto scroll through the files
in the selected folder.
5. Press fto select the desired file
to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five
softkeys can be used to navigate in
the following order:
.First softkey, first item in the list.
.Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
.Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h(Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below hto view and
select a track on an iPod. Files are
sorted by:
.Playlists
.Artists
.Albums
.Genres
.Songs
.Composers
To select tracks:
1. Press the softkey below h.
2. Turn fto scroll through the list
of menus.
3. Press fto select the
desired menu.
4. Turn fto scroll through the
folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press fto select the track.
To skip through large lists, the five
softkeys can be used to navigate in
the following order:
.First softkey, first item in the list.
.Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
.Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.Fifth softkey, end of the list.
"(Repeat All): Press the softkey
below "to repeat all tracks. The
tab appears lowered when Repeat
All is being used. This is the default
mode when a USB storage device
or iPod is first connected.
'(Repeat Track): Press the
softkey below 'to repeat one
track. The tab appears raised when
Repeat Track is being used.
Press the softkey below >,2,
<or =to select between
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.
Black plate (25,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-25
>(Shuffle Off): Press the
softkey below 2to turn shuffle
off. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first
connected.
2(Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle
Songs): Press the softkey below
=or <to shuffle all songs on
the USB storage device or iPod.
<(Shuffle Album): Press the
softkey below >to shuffle all
songs in the current album on
an iPod.
=(Shuffle Folder): Press the
softkey below >to shuffle all
songs in the current folder on a USB
storage device.
Phone
Bluetooth
For vehicles equipped with
Bluetooth capability, the system can
interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
.Placement and receipt of calls in
a hands-free mode.
.Sharing of the cell phone’s
address book or contact list with
the vehicle.
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
.Become familiar with the
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
.Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.
.Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing a
Phone”in this section for more
information.
.If the cell phone has voice
dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the
address book or contact list. See
“Voice Pass-Thru”in this section
for more information.
Black plate (26,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-26 Infotainment System
.See “Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers”in this section for
more information.
{WARNING
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment
(navigation) system. Taking your
eyes off the road too long or too
often could cause a crash
resulting in injury or death. Focus
your attention on driving.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
system can be used while the key is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
for more information on compatible
phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
For additional information say “Help”
while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through the
vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio
system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the in‐
vehicle Bluetooth system. See
Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑2for more information.
bg(Push To Talk) : Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
speech recognition.
xc(Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
Black plate (27,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-27
Pairing
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar
®
Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
Pairing Information
.Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
.Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Pair.”The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
PIN number. The PIN number is
used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturers
user guide.
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle”in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN number that was provided in
Step 3. After the PIN number is
successfully entered, the system
prompts you to provide a name
for the paired cell phone. This
name will be used to indicate
which phones are paired and
connected to the vehicle, see
“Listing All Paired and
Connected Phones”later in this
section for more information.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Black plate (28,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-28 Infotainment System
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with “is connected”
after that phone name.
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “List.”
Deleting a Paired Phone
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones.”
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Delete.”The system asks
for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Change phone.”
.If another cell phone is
found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected.”
.If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags in
the Hands Free Directory that is
shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The following commands are used
delete and store phone numbers.
Store: This command will store a
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands Free Calling
Directory and the OnStarTurn by
Turn Destinations Directory.
Black plate (29,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-29
Using the “Store”Command
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Store.”
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
Using the “Digit Store”Command
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear”at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify”at any time.
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered, say
“Store,”and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
Using the “Delete”Command
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Delete.”
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands Free
Calling Directory and the
OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations
Directory.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
Listing Stored Numbers
The list command will list all the
stored numbers and name tags.
Using the “List”Command
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
4. Say “List.”
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands.
Dial or Call: The dial or call
command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
Black plate (30,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-30 Infotainment System
Digit Dial: This command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
Re‐dial : This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
Using the “Dial”or “Call”
Command
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Dial”or “Call.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “Digit Dial”Command
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear”at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify”at any time.
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “Re‐dial”Command
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
.Press bgto answer the call.
.Press xcto ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
.Press bgto answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
Black plate (31,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Infotainment System 7-31
.Press bgagain to return to the
original call.
.To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
.Press xcto disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Three‐Way Calling
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press bg.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press bgto link all the callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press xcto end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
To mute a call, press bg, and then
say “Mute Call.”
To cancel mute, press bg, and
then say “Un‐mute Call.”
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
The cell phone must be paired and
connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
To Transfer Audio From the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press bg.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
System From a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press bg. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell
phone. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide for more
information.
Black plate (32,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
7-32 Infotainment System
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
1. Press and hold bgfor
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”The system
responds “Bluetooth ready,”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice.”The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>.”
.The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can also be stored for use.
Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press bg. The system
responds “Ready,”followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
Paired Phone and Deleting
Name Tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for FCC information.
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Climate Control Systems
The heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
A. Fan Control
B. Recirculation
C. Temperature Control
D. Outside Air
E. Air Delivery Mode Control
F. Air Conditioning
G. Rear Window Defogger
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
8-2 Climate Controls
Operation
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
When it is cold outside −18°C (0°F)
or lower, use the engine coolant
heater, if vehicle has one, to provide
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An
engine coolant heater warms the
coolant the engine uses that
provides heat to warm the inside of
the vehicle. For more information,
see Engine Heater on page 9‑19.
9(Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. The fan
must be on to run the
air-conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the current airflow mode.
Select from the following:
H(Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air will be
directed toward the side windows.
6(Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets with some air directed
to the windshield and side window
outlets.
-(Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield and floor
outlets, with some air directed to the
side windows. When this mode is
selected, the system automatically
turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The air-conditioning
compressor operates although the
indicator light is not on. The
air-conditioning indicator light turns
off when defog is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed
while in defog mode, the indicator
light will turn on. If the button is
pressed again, the light will turn off.
The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
1(Defrost): This mode quickly
clears the windshield of fog or frost.
Air is directed to the windshield with
some air directed to the floor vents.
In this mode, outside air is pulled
into the vehicle. The air-conditioning
compressor will not run unless the
outside temperature is at or below
freezing. The air-conditioning
compressor operates although the
indicator light is not on. The
air-conditioning indicator light turns
off when defrost is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed
while in defrost mode, the indicator
light turns on. If the button is
pressed again, the light turns off.
Recirculation cannot be selected
while in the defrost mode.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Climate Controls 8-3
To help clear the windshield quickly,
do the following:
1. Select 0.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
#(Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. An indicator light comes on to
show it is on.
The air-conditioning system
removes moisture from the air, so a
small amount of water might drip
under the vehicle while it is idling or
after the engine is turned off is
normal.
Maximum Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows to
let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the air conditioning
system operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do
the following:
1. Select the Cvent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select #air conditioning.
4. Select the ?
recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for
long periods of time can cause the
air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, turn the
recirculation mode off.
:(Outside Air): Press to turn
the outside air mode on. An
indicator light comes on to show
that it is on. Air from outside the
vehicle will circulate throughout the
vehicle. The outside air mode can
be used with all modes, but it
cannot be used with the
recirculation mode. Press :to
cancel the recirculation mode.
?(Recirculation): Press to turn
the recirculation mode on. An
indicator light comes on to show
that it is on. This mode recirculates
and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle. The
recirculation indicator light blinks
three times if you try to use
recirculation in a mode in which it
cannot function.
Pressing this button cancels the
outside air mode. When switching to
the defog or defrost modes the
system automatically moves from
recirculation to outside air. When
the vehicle or fan is turned off and
back on, the system defaults to
outside air automatically. Only use
recirculation mode when it is
needed for comfort, since window
fogging can occur.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
8-4 Climate Controls
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog or frost
from the rear window.
<REAR: Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An
indicator light comes on to show
that the rear window defogger is on.
Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible.
If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph),
the rear window defogger turns off
about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger only runs for about
seven minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off
by turning off the engine.
If the vehicle's speed is maintained
above 80 km/h (50 mph), the rear
window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
If the vehicle has heated outside
mirrors, the surface of the outside
mirrors heat when the rear window
defogger is activated. See Heated
Mirrors on page 2‑14.
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
license, tape, a decal, or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation
For vehicles with the remote start
feature, when it is activated the
climate control system heats or
cools the inside of the vehicle using
the modes that were set before the
vehicle was turned off. The climate
control knobs will remain active
during a remote start. However, the
climate control buttons will be
inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the
climate control system will not
operate during remote start. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Climate Controls 8-5
Automatic Climate Control System
For vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be
automatically controlled.
A. Fan Control
B. Air Conditioning
C. Recirculation
D. Outside Air
E. Rear Window Defogger
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Display
H. Temperature Control
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO
on both the fan speed control and
the air delivery mode control knobs
to activate the automatic system.
When automatic operation is active
the system controls the inside
temperature and air delivery.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode
knob to the AUTO position.
The current set temperature
displays. When AUTO is
selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet is
automatically controlled. The air
conditioning compressor runs
while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air
inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it is hot outside,
the air inlet may automatically
switch to recirculate inside air to
help quickly cool down the
vehicle.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
8-6 Climate Controls
2. Set the temperature.
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C)
is recommended. Allow about
20 minutes for the system to
regulate. Press wor xto
adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If the temperature is
set at 60°F (15°C) the system
remains at the maximum cooling
setting. If the temperature is set
at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat
setting. Choosing either
maximum setting does not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any
faster.
Do not to cover the sensor
located on the top of the
instrument panel near the
windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based
on the intensity of the sun.
Also do not cover the sensor
grille on the lower right side of
the climate control faceplate, as
this regulates the inside
temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at
engine start-up in cold weather,
the system delays turning on the
fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on
the engine coolant temperature.
Turning the fan knob overrides
this delay and changes the fan
to the selected speed.
Manual Operation
9(Off): Select this position on the
fan knob to turn off the entire
climate control system. Outside air
still enters the vehicle. The airflow
direction and temperature can be
adjusted.
x/wTemperature Control:
Press the arrows to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.
9(Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the direction of the airflow in
the vehicle.
Select from the following:
H(Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
6(Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets with some air directed
to the side window outlets.
-(Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the floor and windshield
outlets.
0(Defrost): This mode clears the
windows of fog or frost more quickly.
The system automatically controls
the fan speed if defrost is selected
from the AUTO mode. If the outside
temperature is 4°C (40°F) or
warmer, the air conditioning
compressor automatically runs to
help dehumidify the air and dry the
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Climate Controls 8-7
windshield. The air conditioning
indicator light blinks three times if
the compressor is turned off while in
this mode.
#(Air Conditioning): Press turn
the air conditioning on and off. An
indicator light turns on to show the
air conditioning is on.
When air conditioning is selected or
is in AUTO mode, the system runs
the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering
the vehicle.
On hot days, open the windows long
enough to let hot inside air escape.
This reduces the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the
windows closed for the air
conditioner to work its best.
On cool, but sunny days while using
manual operation of the automatic
system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the
instrument panel outlets. To warm or
cool the air delivered, press the
temperature buttons to the desired
setting.
In AUTO mode the system cools
and dehumidifies the air inside the
vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode,
the system maximizes its
performance by using recirculation
as necessary.
Heating: On cold days when using
manual operation of the automatic
system, use floor mode to deliver air
to the floor outlets. To warm or cool
the air delivered, press xor wto
the desired temperature setting.
To use the automatic mode, turn the
knob to AUTO and press xor wto
adjust the temperature.
:(Outside Air): Press to turn
the outside air mode on. An
indicator light comes on to show it is
on. Air from outside the vehicle will
circulate throughout the vehicle. The
outside air mode can be used with
all modes, but it cannot be used
with the recirculation mode.
Pressing this button cancels the
recirculation mode.
h(Recirculation): Press to turn
the recirculation mode on. An
indicator light above the button
comes on to show it is on. This
mode recirculates and helps to
quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to help
prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle. The
recirculation indicator light blinks
three times if you try to use
recirculation in a mode in which it
cannot function.
Pressing this button cancels the
auto recirculation feature. Each time
the vehicle is started, the system
reverts to the auto recirculation
function.
The recirculation mode cannot be
used with the floor, defrost, or defog
modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator flashes
three times and turns off to indicate
that this is not allowed. This is to
prevent window fogging.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
8-8 Climate Controls
When the weather is cool or damp,
operating the system in recirculation
for extended periods of time can
cause fogging of the vehicle's
windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or defrost. Make sure
the air conditioning is on. Allow the
air conditioning to run automatically
to help dehumidify the air.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
<(Rear): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An
indicator light comes on to show
that the rear window defogger is on.
If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph),
the rear window defogger turns off
about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time
is needed, press the button again.
If the vehicle's speed is maintained
above 80 km/h (50 mph), the rear
window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
For vehicles with heated outside
mirrors, the surface of the outside
mirrors will also heat when the rear
window defogger is activated. See
Heated Mirrors on page 2‑14.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation
For vehicles with remote start, when
it is activated the climate control
system heats and cools the inside of
the vehicle using the previous
system settings before the vehicle
was turned off. The climate control
knobs will remain active during a
remote start. However, the climate
control buttons will be inactive until
the ignition is turned on by the key.
If the fan is off, the climate control
system will not operate during
remote start.
With the automatic climate control
system, the climate control displays
“RS”in place of the temperature to
indicate that remote start is
activated. For best performance,
turn both the fan and mode knobs to
AUTO. If the temperature is cold
enough and the mode knob is set to
AUTO, the system begins in defrost
to clear the windows. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Climate Controls 8-9
Air Vents
Use the lever located in the center
of each outlet by moving it either up
and down or side-to-side, to change
the direction and amount of airflow
in the vehicle.
Operation Tips
.Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.Do not use non-GM approved
hood deflectors as they could
adversely affect the performance
of the system.
.Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
.When an objectionable odor
outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the
recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a
comfortable setting to prevent
the odor from entering the
vehicle through the ventilation
system. This can be helpful
when driving through a long
tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this
mode in cold or cool weather
can cause window fogging.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
8-10 Climate Controls
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Running the Vehicle While
Parked ..................... 9-23
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-37
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.”The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑9.
{WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{WARNING
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious —or even
fatal —collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-3
Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving. In
recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has
been drinking —driver or
passenger —is in a crash, that
person's chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help
to control the vehicle while
driving —brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑18.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle and
others is important.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-4 Driving and Operating
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Some people drive in
spurts —heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking —rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the vehicle has the electric power
steering system and the engine
stalls while driving, the power
steering assist system will continue
to operate until you are able to stop
the vehicle. If power steering assist
is lost because the electric power
steering system is not functioning,
the vehicle can be steered but it will
take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in
either direction several times until it
stops, or hold the steering wheel in
the stopped position for an
extended amount of time, you may
notice a reduced amount of power
steering assist. The normal amount
of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal
steering movements.
The electric power steering
system does not require regular
maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems, contact
your dealer for service repairs.
Hydraulic Power Steering
If the vehicle has the hydraulic
power steering system and power
steering assist is lost because the
engine stops or the power steering
system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will
take more effort.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-5
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking —if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for
evasive action —steering around
the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply
the brakes. See Braking on
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-6 Driving and Operating
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems —brakes,
steering, and acceleration —do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-7
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues —such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface —and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
{WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-8 Driving and Operating
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
.Allow extra following distance.
.Pass with caution.
.Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
.Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
.Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑42.
.Turn off cruise control.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Other driving tips include:
.Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.Keep interior temperature cool.
.Keep your eyes moving —scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
.Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
.Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
{WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-9
{WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
.Top of hills: Be
alert —something could
be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
.Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑27 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-10 Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10. To get help and keep
everyone in the vehicle safe:
.Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
{WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑22.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-11
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system,
it can often help to free a stuck
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's
traction system in the Index. If stuck
too severely for the traction system
to free the vehicle, turn the traction
system off and use the rocking
method.
{WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑65.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-12 Driving and Operating
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
{WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑42 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑51.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-13
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label”later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs”on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 −750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑45
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-14 Driving and Operating
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification
label is attached to the driver
side center pillar (B-pillar). The
label tells the gross weight
capacity of the vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-15
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for
the vehicle, or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
And, if there is a heavy load, it
should be spread out. See
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit”earlier in this
section.
{WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
If you put things inside the
vehicle —like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything
else —they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{WARNING
Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash.
.Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
.Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
.Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
.Do not leave a seat folded
down unless needed.
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-16 Driving and Operating
Starting and
Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
.Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
.Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Trailer Towing
on page 9‑45 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the
vehicle and more
information.
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
must be in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-17
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
9(STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑20
This position locks the ignition.
It also locks the transmission. The
key can only be removed in
LOCK/OFF.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
In an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑28
The steering can bind with the
wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, the vehicle needs
service.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position lets you use things like the
radio and windshield wipers while
the engine is not running.
R(ON/RUN): This position can be
used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
instrument panel warning lights. The
switch will stay in this position while
the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to
start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
/(START): This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to the ON/RUN position
for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the
driver door is opened, the ignition is
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
and the key is in the ignition.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-18 Driving and Operating
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow
down as the engine warms. Do
not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To
prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to
the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5 to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-19
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine warm‐
up in cold weather conditions at or
below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an
engine coolant heater should be
plugged in at least four hours before
starting the vehicle. An internal
thermostat in the plug-end of the
cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. With a 4 cylinder
engine, the engine coolant
heater cord is located near the
air cleaner box on the passenger
side of the engine compartment.
With a V6 engine, the engine
coolant heater cord is located on
the driver side around the
battery box. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6for more information
on location.
{WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
3. Plug the cord into a normal,
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts
and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-20 Driving and Operating
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.Audio System
.Power Windows
.Heated Seats (if equipped)
.Sunroof (if equipped)
These features continue to work up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF.
The power windows, heated seats,
and sunroof will work until any door
is opened.
The radio continues to work until the
driver door is opened.
All these features operate when the
key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
Shifting Into Park
{WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑42.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑28 for
more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the shift
lever all the way toward the front
of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Black plate (21,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-21
Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running
{WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever
away from P (Park) without first
pushing the button.
If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked in
P (Park).
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much force
on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is
designed to:
.Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released.
.Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑84
Black plate (22,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-22 Driving and Operating
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you are still having a problem
shifting, see your dealer.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
{WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{WARNING
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Black plate (23,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-23
WARNING (Continued)
.There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑22.
{WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑20.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑42.
Black plate (24,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-24 Driving and Operating
Automatic
Transmission
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
{WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑20. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Trailer Towing on
page 9‑45.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
brake pedal then press the shift
lever button before you can shift
from P (Park) while the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
page 9‑21.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.
Black plate (25,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-25
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
{WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
M (Manual Mode): This position,
allows you to change gears similar
to a manual transmission. If the
vehicle has this feature, see Driver
Shift Control (DSC).
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
While driving in manual mode,
the transmission will remain in
the driver selected gear. When
coming to a stop in the manual
position, the vehicle will
automatically shift into
2 (Second) gear.
Black plate (26,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-26 Driving and Operating
2. Press the + (plus) end of the
button on the side of the shifter
to upshift, or push the −(minus)
end of the button to downshift.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
in the instrument cluster will change
from the currently displayed
message to the letter “M”, for
Manual position, and a number
indicating the requested gear.
While using the DSC feature the
transmission will have firmer shifting
and sportier performance. You can
use this for sport driving or when
climbing hills to stay in gear longer
or to downshift for more power or
engine braking.
The transmission will only allow
you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (RPM):
.The transmission will not
automatically shift to the next
higher gear if the vehicle speed
or engine RPM is too low.
.The transmission will not allow
shifting to the next lower gear if
the vehicle speed or engine
RPM is too high.
Second or Third Gear Start
Feature
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift the gear
select tap switch into Second or
Third gear. A higher gear allows you
to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
With the DSC feature, the vehicle
can be set to pull away in Second or
Third gear.
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) into the
M (Manual Mode).
2. With the vehicle stopped,
press (+) end of the button to
select Second or Third gear. The
vehicle will start from a stop
position in Second or Third gear.
3. Once moving select the desired
drive gear.
Black plate (27,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-27
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑19.
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Black plate (28,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-28 Driving and Operating
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, push down
the parking brake pedal with your
left foot. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 5‑18.
To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down with
your right foot. Push down
momentarily on the parking brake
pedal with your left foot until you
feel the pedal release. If the parking
brake is not released when you
begin to drive, the brake system
warning light comes on and a chime
sounds as a warning that the
parking brake is still on.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message
will also display in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) as a
reminder to release the parking
brake. See Brake System Messages
on page 5‑26.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑42.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates. The
brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Black plate (29,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-29
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction
Control System (TCS) that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The
system operates only if it senses
that the front wheels are spinning
too much or are beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and
reduces engine power by closing
the throttle and managing engine
spark to limit wheel spin.
This light will flash when the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control
when TCS begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. The cruise
control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑32.
When this light is on solid and either
the SERVICE TRACTION or
TRACTION OFF message is
displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Ride Control System Messages on
page 5‑27 for more information.
The Traction Control System is
automatically enabled whenever the
vehicle is started. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, always leave the system
enabled. TCS can be turned off if
needed.
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock”the vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 9‑11.
Black plate (30,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-30 Driving and Operating
To turn the system off or on, press
and release this button located on
the center console.
The DIC will display the appropriate
message as described previously
when the button is pressed.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the
wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each
individual wheel (brake-traction
control) as necessary.
The traction control system is
enabled automatically when the
vehicle is started, and it will activate
and flash the ESC/TCS light and
display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the
front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while
driving. For more information on the
LOW TRACTION message, see
Ride Control System Messages on
page 5‑27.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
are allowed to spin excessively
while the ESC/TCS, ABS and
Brake warning lights and the
SERVICE ESC and/or SERVICE
TRACTION messages are
displayed, the differential could
be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power
and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is
turned off, it is possible to lose
traction. If you attempt to shift
with the front wheels spinning
with a loss of traction, it is
possible to cause damage to the
transmission. Do not attempt to
shift when the front wheels do not
have traction. Damage caused by
misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
The traction control system may
activate on dry or rough roads or
under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, a
reduction in acceleration may be
noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control
when the system activates, the
ESC/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control
may be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control
on page 9‑32.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3for more information.
Black plate (31,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-31
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)
The vehicle has an Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system
which combines antilock brake,
traction and stability control systems
and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in
most driving conditions.
When you first start the vehicle and
begin to drive away, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a
problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
If the system fails to turn on or
activate, the ESC/TCS light will be
on solid, and the ESC OFF or
SERVICE ESC message will be
displayed.
For more information, see Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑27.
This light will flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working; this is normal.
When the light is on solid and either
the SERVICE ESC or ESC OFF
message is displayed, the system
will not assist the driver in
maintaining directional control of the
vehicle. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑27.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is automatically
enabled whenever the vehicle is
started. To assist the driver with
vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should
always be left on. But, ESC can be
turned off if needed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control
when the system begins to assist
the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS
light will flash and the cruise control
will automatically disengage. The
cruise control system may be
re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑32.
Black plate (32,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-32 Driving and Operating
The ESC/TCS button is located on
the instrument panel.
The traction control system can be
turned off or back on by pressing
the ESC/TCS button. To disable
both traction control and ESC, press
and hold the button briefly.
When the ESC system is turned off,
the TRACTION OFF and ESC OFF
messages will appear, and the ESC/
TCS light will be on solid to warn
the driver that both traction control
and ESC are disabled.
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock”the vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 9‑11.
ESC may also turn off automatically
if it determines that a problem exists
with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the
ESC/TCS light will be on solid to
warn the driver that ESC is disabled
and requires service. If the problem
does not clear after restarting the
vehicle, see your dealer for service.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑27 for more information.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3for more information.
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more be
maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and
the Traction Control System (TCS)
or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control automatically disengages.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑29 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑31. When road conditions
allow, the cruise control can be
used again.
Black plate (33,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-33
{WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
The cruise control buttons are
located on the steering wheel.
I(On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
RES+ (Resume): Press briefly to
make the vehicle resume a
previously set speed or press and
hold to accelerate.
SET−(Set): Press to set the speed
and activate cruise control or make
the vehicle decelerate.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
1. Press Ito turn cruise control
on. The indicator light on the
button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET−and release it.
The cruise symbol displays in
the instrument panel cluster to
show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Black plate (34,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-34 Driving and Operating
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory. The cruise
symbol in the instrument panel
cluster also goes out indicating
cruise is no longer engaged. Once
the vehicle speed is 40 km/h
(25 mph) or greater, press the RES+
button on the steering wheel. The
vehicle returns to the previously set
speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.Press and hold the RES+ button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
.To increase the vehicle speed in
small amounts, press the RES+
button briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.Press and hold the SET−on the
steering wheel until the lower
speed desired is reached, then
release it.
.To slow down in small amounts,
press the SET−button briefly.
Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previously set cruise control speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle at a lower speed. When the
brakes are applied this ends the
cruise control.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to end cruise
control:
.To disengage the cruise control,
step lightly on the brake pedal.
.To turn off cruise control, press
the Ibutton.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory, by pressing
the Ibutton or if the ignition is
turned off.
Black plate (35,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-35
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
The eighth digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine. The
VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
page 12‑1.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑37. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑35.
Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine
(VIN Code 1) or the 2.4L L4 engine
(VIN Code U), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, an audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock, might be heard when
driving. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
(VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best
performance or trailer towing, you
could choose to use middle grade
89 octane unleaded gasoline. If the
octane rating is less than 87, an
Black plate (36,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-36 Driving and Operating
audible knocking noise, commonly
referred to as spark knock, might be
heard when driving. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
(U.S. and Canada Only)
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification D 4814 in
the United States or CAN/
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑36 for additional
information.
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑15. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
Never use leaded gasoline or any
other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
Black plate (37,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-37
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
and avoid problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change, can
help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
spark plug life and affect emission
control system performance. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
For all other vehicles, use only the
unleaded gasoline described under
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑35.
We encourage the use of E85 in
vehicles that are designed to use it.
The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn
and other crops.
Black plate (38,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-38 Driving and Operating
Many service stations will not have
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
available. The U.S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/
locator/stations/) that can help you
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
have E85 should have a label
indicating ethanol content. Do not
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet
ASTM Specification D 5798. By
definition, this means that fuel
labeled E85 will have an ethanol
content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel
mixtures that do not meet ASTM
specifications can affect driveability
and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
To ensure quick starts in the
wintertime, the E85 fuel must be
formulated properly for your climate
according to ASTM specification
D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the E85
fuel is not properly formulated for
your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding
gasoline to the fuel tank can
improve starting. For good starting
and heater efficiency below 0°C
(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than
70% ethanol. It is best not to
alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible —do
not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
refueling. You should drive the
vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
E85 has less energy per liter
(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more
often when using E85 than when
you are using gasoline. See Filling
the Tank on page 9‑39.
Notice: Some additives are not
compatible with E85 fuel and can
harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85.
Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Black plate (39,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-39
Filling the Tank
{WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is behind the fuel
door on the vehicle's passenger
side. To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
Turn the tethered fuel cap
counterclockwise to remove. If the
vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the
fuel cap will be yellow and state that
E85 or gasoline can be used. See
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑37. While refueling, hang the
tethered fuel cap from the hook on
the fuel door. Reinstall the cap by
turning it clockwise until it clicks.
If the cap is not properly installed,
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
come on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5‑15 for more
information.
Black plate (40,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-40 Driving and Operating
{WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Do not top off or overfill the tank and
wait a few seconds before removing
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑90.
{WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer. The
wrong type of fuel cap might not
fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑15.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
{WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
Black plate (41,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-41
WARNING (Continued)
.Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
.Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
.Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
.For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
.For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑88. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑88.
Black plate (42,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-42 Driving and Operating
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
{WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly. For
example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well —or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer when
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. For trailering
capacity, see Trailer Towing on
page 9‑45. Trailering changes
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy. With
the added weight, the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and
tires are forced to work harder and
under greater loads. The trailer also
adds wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper
trailering equipment.
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules for
your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
.There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
.Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
.During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
.The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
.Obey speed limit restrictions. Do
not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
Black plate (43,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-43
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Towing with a Stability Control
System
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers.
Black plate (44,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-44 Driving and Operating
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
The turn signal indicators
on the instrument panel flash
whenever signaling a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other
drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
boils at a lower temperature than at
normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle could show
signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If the
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 10‑20.
Parking on Hills
{WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
Black plate (45,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-45
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift into a gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑20.
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
.The weight of the trailer.
.The weight of the trailer tongue.
.The total weight on your
vehicle's tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
information.
Black plate (46,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-46 Driving and Operating
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5for more
information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
for more information.
The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10‐15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Tire-Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12. Make sure not to go over
the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Black plate (47,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Driving and Operating 9-47
Towing Equipment
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
.The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
.Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 9‑22.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑36 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑37.
Black plate (48,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
9-48 Driving and Operating
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ...................... 10-14
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check ..................... 10-27
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check ..................... 10-28
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps (LS and LT) . . . . 10-30
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps (LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-83
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories to
the vehicle can affect vehicle
performance and safety, including
such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑37.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
{WARNING
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.Be sure you have
sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper
replacement parts, and tools
before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and English
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑36.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on page 11‑8.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release handle
with this symbol on it. It is
located inside the vehicle to the
left of the steering column. 2. Then go to the front of the
vehicle and push the secondary
hood release handle toward the
driver side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it
will continue to open to the full
position. Before closing the
hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood
until the lifting force of the strut
is reduced, then release the
hood to latch fully. Check to
make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if
necessary.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4 L L4 Engine
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑14.
B. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑16.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil”under
Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See “Checking Engine
Oil”under Engine Oil on
page 10‑9.
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑16.
F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10‑16.
G. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 10‑24.
H. Battery on page 10‑26.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid”under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑23.
J. See Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑36.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-8 Vehicle Care
3.6 L V6 Engine
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑14.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑22.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil”under
Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil”under
Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
(Out of View). See Cooling
System on page 10‑16.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑16.
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10‑16.
H. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 10‑24.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑14.
J. See Battery on page 10‑26.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑36.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid”under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑23.
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine oil.
Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
.Always use engine oil approved
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
.Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil”and “When to Add
Engine Oil”in this section.
.Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑13.
.Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil”in this section.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-10 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutesfor the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
L4 Engine
V6 Engine
If the oil is below the MIN
(minimum) mark for the L4 engine or
below the cross‐hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick for the V6 engine,
add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended
oil and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the upper mark that
shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be
damaged. You should drain out
the excess oil or limit driving of
the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-11
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
Specification
Use and ask for engine oils with the
dexos™certification mark. Oils
meeting the requirements of the
vehicle should have the dexos
certification mark on the container.
This certification mark indicates that
the oil has been approved to the
dexos specification.
This vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos‐approved engine oil.
Notice: Use only engine oil that is
approved to the dexos
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos
specification will show the dexos
symbol on the container. Failure
to use the recommended engine
oil or equivalent can result in
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty. If you are
unsure whether the oil is
approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
provider.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos is unavailable: In the event
that dexos‐approved engine oil is
not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
dexos specification, however, may
result in reduced performance under
certain circumstances.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-12 Vehicle Care
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
be used. An oil of this viscosity
grade will provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. When selecting
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
grade, be sure to always select
an oil that meets the required
specification, dexos. See
“Specification”earlier in this
section for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos
specification and displaying the
dexos certification mark are all that
is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-13
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes on. See Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑26. Change
the oil as soon as possible within
the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change is
not necessary for up to a year. The
engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and,
at this time, the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
with the engine off.
2. Press and hold the DIC INFO
and reset buttons, on the left
side of the steering wheel, at the
same time to enter the
personalization menu. The OIL
LIFE RESET message displays.
See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 5‑22 and Engine
Oil Messages on page 5‑26.
3. Press and hold the reset button
until the DIC display shows
ACKNOWLEDGED.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
The system is reset when the
CHANGE OIL SOON message
is off.
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-14 Vehicle Care
If the CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and be
sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
For the 2.4 L and 3.6 L engines, the
transmission fluid will not reach the
end of the dipstick unless the
transmission is at operating
temperature. If the transmission fluid
level needs to be checked, please
take the vehicle to the dealer.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2for more
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required.
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-15
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Remove the spring clamps that
hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the
alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the
tabs on the rim of the top cover
into the bottom hinges and turn
the cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage
easily, if the cover is properly
seated.
{WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-16 Vehicle Care
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 2.4 L L4
Engine Similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans
(Out of View)
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
{WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL
®
can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL
®
engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑20.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-17
What to Use
{WARNING
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.Will not damage aluminum parts.
.Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
changed by an authorized service
center, familiar with legal
requirements regarding used
coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
health.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this is
done. See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑20 for more information.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-18 Vehicle Care
The coolant level should be at or
above the FULL COLD mark on the
coolant surge tank. If it is not, there
may be a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank
{WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
cap —even a little —they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
{WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-19
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise about
two or two and one-half turns.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
stop. This will allow any
pressure still left to be vented
out the discharge hose.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture, to the FULL
COLD mark. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if
the level is below the mark. If the
level is below the FULL COLD
mark, add additional coolant to
bring the level up to the mark.
Repeat this procedure until the
level remains constant at the
FULL COLD mark for at least
five minutes.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the
upper radiator hose can be felt
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
might be lower. If the level is
lower than the FULL COLD
mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be
sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-20 Vehicle Care
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
There is an engine coolant
temperature gauge as well as an
engine coolant temperature warning
light on the vehicle's instrument
panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑11
and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 5‑20.
If it is decided not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
If it is decided to lift the hood, make
sure the vehicle is parked on a level
surface.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
If Steam is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
{WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
If No Steam is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.Stops after high-speed driving.
.Idles for long periods in traffic.
.Tows a trailer.
Black plate (21,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-21
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
following.
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to a
safe place in an emergency
situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, a significant loss in power
and engine performance will be
noticed. The temperature gauge will
indicate an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended km (mi)
and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
Notice: After driving in the
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair. The
engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
Black plate (22,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-22 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all
vehicles with the V6 engine.
Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine
have electric power steering and do
not use power steering fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless a
leak is suspected in the system,
or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid
loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The fluid level should be between
the MIN (Minimum) and MAX
(Maximum) marks when the engine
is cold, and at the MAX mark when
the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the
MIN mark when the engine is cold
or hot, power steering fluid should
be added.
The fluid level should be within the
crosshatch area on the dipstick.
If the fluid is at or below the ADD or
MIN mark on the dipstick, add just
enough fluid to bring the level within
the crosshatch area.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always
use the proper fluid.
Black plate (23,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-23
Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid is
needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature may fall
below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is low, a LOW WASHER
FLUID message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑22 for more information.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6for reservoir location.
Notice:
.When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
.Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
.Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion if
freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is
completely full.
.Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
Black plate (24,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-24 Vehicle Care
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
{WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes —for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Black plate (25,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-25
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
.A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
{WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑18.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Black plate (26,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-26 Vehicle Care
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
{WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
.Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
.If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6for battery location.
{DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑84 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Black plate (27,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-27
Starter Switch Check
{WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑28.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
{WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑28.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Black plate (28,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-28 Vehicle Care
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
.The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
.To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Black plate (29,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-29
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2for more information.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly on a
regular basis or when worn. For
proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑7.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
connector away from the
windshield.
2. Press the button in the middle of
the wiper arm connector, and
pull the wiper blade away from
the arm connector.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at
the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended that
the vehicle be taken to a dealer for
service.
Black plate (30,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-30 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑34.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
and Stoplamps
(LS and LT)
A. Back‐up Lamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9for more information.
Black plate (31,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-31
2. Remove the two rear
convenience net hooks holding
the trunk trim and move the trim
aside.
3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),
which hold the taillamp
assembly, from inside the trunk.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
5. Turn the bulb socket (B)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (A).
6. Pull the bulb from the socket (B).
7. Install a new bulb.
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to
reinstall the taillamp
assembly (A).
Black plate (32,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-32 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
and Stoplamps (LTZ)
A. Back‐up Lamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9for more information.
2. Remove the two rear
convenience net hooks holding
the trunk trim and move the trim
aside.
3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),
which hold the taillamp
assembly, from inside the trunk.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
Black plate (33,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-33
5. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector (C) from the LED (B).
6. Turn the LED (B)
counterclockwise to remove it.
7. Install a new LED (B).
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to
reinstall the taillamp
assembly (A).
Back-Up Lamps
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9for more information.
2. Remove the push pins holding
the trunk trim (B).
3. Move the trim aside far enough
to gain access to the bulb
assembly (A).
Black plate (34,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-34 Vehicle Care
4. Turn the bulb socket (B)
counterclockwise to remove from
the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb (A) from the
socket (B).
6. Install the new bulb.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to
reinstall.
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate
lamp bulb:
1. Remove the license plate bezel
assembly by turning the two
screws counterclockwise.
2. Turn and pull the license plate
lamp assembly forward through
the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it
clockwise to install.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb
Number
Back-up Lamp 921
License Plate Lamp 168
Rear Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
(LS and LT)
3157K LL
Rear LED Turn
Signal Lamp/
Taillamp (LTZ)
GM P/N
25874489
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact the dealer.
Black plate (35,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-35
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
.Headlamp Wiring
.Windshield Wiper Motor
.Power Windows and Other
Power Accessories
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by
fuses. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible.
Black plate (36,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-36 Vehicle Care
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑36,Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑38, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑40.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block
is located on the driver side of the
engine compartment, near the
battery.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component. The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuses Usage
1 Air Conditioner Clutch
2Electronic Throttle
Control
Fuses Usage
3 Not Used
4Transmission Control
Module Ignition 1
5Mass Airflow
Sensor (LY7)
6 Emission
Black plate (37,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-37
Fuses Usage
7Left Headlamp
Low-Beam
8 Horn
9Right Headlamp
Low-Beam
10 Front Fog Lamps
11 Left Headlamp
High-Beam
12 Right Headlamp
High-Beam
13 Engine Control
Module BATT
14 Windshield Wiper
15 Antilock Brake
System (IGN 1)
16 Engine Control
Module IGN 1
17 Cooling Fan 1
Fuses Usage
18 Cooling Fan 2
19
Run Relay, Heating,
Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Blower
20 Body Control
Module 1
21 Body Control Module
Run/Crank
22 Rear Electrical
Center 1
23 Rear Electrical
Center 2
24 Antilock Brake
System
25 Body Control
Module 2
26 Starter
41 Electric Power
Steering
Fuses Usage
42 Transmission Control
Module Battery
43
Ignition Module
(LE9 & LE5);
Injectors, Ignition
Coils Odd (LY7)
44
Injectors (LE9 & LE5);
Injectors, Ignition
Coils Even (LY7)
45 Post Cat 02 Sensor
Heaters (LY7)
46 Daytime Running
Lamps
47 Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp
50 Driver Power Window
51 Not Used
52 AIR Solenoid
54 Regulated Voltage
Control
Black plate (38,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-38 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
55 DC/AC Inverter
56 Antilock Brake
System BATT
Relays Usage
28 Cooling Fan 1
29 Cooling Fan Series/
Parallel
30 Cooling Fan 2
31 Starter
32 Run/Crank, Ignition
33 Powertrain
34 Air Conditioning
Clutch
35 High Beam
Relays Usage
36 Front Fog Lamps
37 Horn
38 Low-Beam Headlamp
39 Windshield Wiper 1
40 Windshield Wiper 2
48 Daytime Running
Lamps
49 Stoplamps
53 AIR Solenoid
Diodes Usage
27 Wiper
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the instrument panel
near the floor on the passenger side
of the vehicle.
Remove the panel cover to access
the fuse block, then remove the fuse
block cover to access the fuses.
Black plate (39,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-39
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays and
features shown.
Fuses Usage
POWER
MIRRORS Power Mirrors
EPS Electronic Power
Steering
Fuses Usage
RUN/CRANK
Cruise Control
Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator
Fuses Usage
HVAC
BLOWER
HIGH
Heating Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Blower - High
Speed Relay
CLUSTER/
THEFT
Instrument Panel
Cluster, Theft
Deterrent System
ONSTAR OnStar
®
(If Equipped)
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
AIRBAG
(IGN) Airbag (Ignition)
HVAC
CTRL (BATT)
Heating Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Control Diagnostic
Link Connector
(Battery)
PEDAL Not Used
WIPER SW Windshield Wiper/
Washer Switch
IGN
SENSOR Ignition Switch
Black plate (40,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-40 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
STRG WHL
ILLUM
Steering Wheel
Illumination
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
RADIO Audio System
INTERIOR
LIGHTS Interior Lamps
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
POWER
WINDOWS Power Windows
HVAC
CTRL (IGN)
Heating Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
HVAC
BLOWER
Heating Ventilation
Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
DOOR LOCK Door Locks
ROOF/
HEAT SEAT
Sunroof,
Heated Seat
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
Fuses Usage
NOT
INSTALLED Not Used
AIRBAG
(BATT) Airbag (Battery)
SPARE
FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE
FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE
FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE
FUSE
HOLDER
Spare Fuse Holder
FUSE
PULLER Fuse Puller
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
The rear compartment fuse block is
located in the trunk of the vehicle.
Access the fuse block through the
trunk panel on the driver side of the
rear cargo area.
Black plate (41,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-41
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuses Usage
1Passenger Seat
Controls
2 Driver Seat Controls
3 Not Used
Fuses Usage
4 Not Used
5Emission 2, Canister
Vent Solenoid
6
Park Lamps,
Instrument Panel
Dimming
Fuses Usage
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Sunroof Controls
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Audio Amplifier
14 Heated Seat Controls
15 Not Used
16
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System, XM™
Satellite Radio
(If Equipped)
17 Back-up Lamps
18 Not Used
19 Not Used
20 Auxiliary Power
Outlets
21 Not Used
Black plate (42,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-42 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
22 Trunk Release
23 Rear Defog
24 Heated Mirrors
25 Fuel Pump
Relays Usage
26 Rear Window
Defogger
27 Park Lamps
28 Not Used
29 Not Used
Relays Usage
30 Not Used
31 Not Used
32 Not Used
33 Back-up Lamps
34 Not Used
35 Not Used
36 Trunk Release
37 Fuel Pump
38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer.
{WARNING
.Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
.Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
(Continued)
Black plate (43,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-43
WARNING (Continued)
.Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when the
tires are cold.
.Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact —such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
.Worn or old tires can cause a
crash. If the tread is badly
worn, replace them.
.Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.Improperly repaired tires can
cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
.Do not spin the tires in
excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such as
snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation on page 10‑52 for
inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed driving.
Winter Tires
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on
snow or ice covered roads is
expected. All season tires provide
good overall performance on most
surfaces, but they may not offer the
traction or the same level of
performance as winter tires on
snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction on
snow and ice covered roads. With
winter tires, there may be decreased
dry road traction, increased road
noise, and shorter tread life. After
changing to winter tires, be alert for
changes in vehicle handling and
braking.
Black plate (44,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-44 Vehicle Care
See your dealer for details
regarding winter tire availability and
proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 10‑59.
If using snow tires:
.Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
.Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires with a lower speed rating are
chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
Low-Profile Tires
If your vehicle has P225/50R18
or P225/50R17 size tires, they
are classified as low‐profile
performance tires. These tires
are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement.
You may also notice more road
noise with low‐profile
performance tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
Notice: If the vehicle has
low‐profile tires, they are more
susceptible to damage from
road hazards or curb impact
than standard profile tires.
Tire and/or wheel assembly
damage can occur when
coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes,
or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb.
The vehicle warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when
possible avoid contact with
curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
Black plate (45,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-45
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size:The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size”illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification):Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation):The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN):The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are
the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material:The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG):Tire
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑62.
Black plate (46,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-46 Vehicle Care
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit:Maximum load that
can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material:The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only:The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 mi) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a
regular road tire has lost air and
gone flat. If the vehicle has a
compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑83 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑65.
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN):The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is
the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit:Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation:The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑51.
(F) Tire Size:A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
Black plate (47,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-47
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification):Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following is an example of a
typical passenger vehicle
tire size.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width:The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio:A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code:A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias
ply construction; and the letter B
means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter:Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description:These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Black plate (48,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-48 Vehicle Care
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure:The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Accessory Weight:The
combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are,
automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio:The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Belt:A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead:The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure:The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑51.
Curb Weight:The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings:A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR:Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
GAWR FRT:Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Black plate (49,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-49
GAWR RR:Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa):The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index:An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating:The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight:The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall:The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure:Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑51 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
Black plate (50,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-50 Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire:A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim:A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall:The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating:An
alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction:The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread:The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators:Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑59.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards):A tire
information system that
provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 10‑62.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire:Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard:A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label”under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Black plate (51,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-51
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Neither tire
underinflation nor
overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
that do not have enough air,
can result in:
.Tire overloading and
over-heating which could
lead to a blowout.
.Premature or
irregular wear.
.Poor handling.
.Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that
have too much air, can
result in:
.Unusual wear.
.Poor handling.
.Rough ride.
.Needless damage from
road hazards.
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle. This
label shows the vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressures for the tires
when they are cold. The
recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is
the minimum amount of air
pressure needed to support the
vehicle's maximum load carrying
capacity.
For additional information
regarding how much weight the
vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12. How
you load the vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load the vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the tires once a month or
more. Do not forget to check the
compact spare tire, if the vehicle
has one. The compact spare
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on
page 10‑83.
Black plate (52,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-52 Vehicle Care
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if the tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are underinflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
the vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the tire valve. Re‐
check the tire pressure with the
tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
{WARNING
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
Set the cold tire inflation pressure to
35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and
rear tires, when operating your
vehicle at high-speed conditions.
When you end high-speed driving
return the tires to the cold inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12
and Tire Pressure on page 10‑51.
Black plate (53,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-53
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑54 for
additional information.
Black plate (54,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-54 Vehicle Care
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the tires and transmits the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS turns on the
low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
A message to check the pressure in
a specific tire displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). The low
tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays see Tire Messages on
page 5‑29.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and
needs to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label
shows the size of the original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑51.
The TPMS system can warn about
a low tire pressure condition but it
does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑57,Tire Rotation on
page 10‑57 and Tires on
page 10‑42.
Black plate (55,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-55
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use only the
GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑67 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire pressure warning light
flashes for about one minute and
then stays on for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message also displays. The
malfunction light and DIC warning
message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected.
Some of the conditions that can
cause these to come on are:
.One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and the DIC message
should go off after the road tire
is replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
.The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the tires. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process. See
"TPMS Sensor Matching
Process" later in this section.
.One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the
TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
your dealer for service.
.Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑59.
Black plate (56,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-56 Vehicle Care
.Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning
properly, it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message come on
and stay on.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process
should also be performed after
replacing a spare tire with a road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off at the next
ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
There are two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
The TPMS matching process is:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons, at the same
time, for about five seconds to
start the TPMS learn mode. The
horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in
learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front
tire. The driver side front turn
signal also comes on to indicate
that corner's sensor is ready to
be learned.
5. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
6. The passenger side front turn
signal comes on to indicate that
corner sensor is ready to be
learned. Proceed to the
passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. The passenger side rear turn
signal comes on to indicate that
corner sensor is ready to be
learned. Proceed to the
passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Black plate (57,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-57
8. The driver side rear turn signal
comes on to indicate that corner
sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure in
Step 5.
9. After hearing the single horn
chirp for the driver side rear tire,
two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning
process is done. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If no tires are learned after
entering the TPMS learn mode,
or if communication with the
receiver stops, or if the time limit
has expired, turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF and start
over beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Tire Inspection
GM recommends that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
.The indicators at three or
more places around the tire
can be seen.
.There is cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
.The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
.The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
Black plate (58,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-58 Vehicle Care
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon as
possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑59 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑64.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑51 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑54.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque”under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
{WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑65.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
Black plate (59,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-59
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Factors such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds,
vehicle loading, and road conditions
affect the wear rate of the tires.
Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑57 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑57 for more
information.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple conditions
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. Tires will typically need
to be replaced due to wear before
they may need to be replaced
due to age. Consult the tire
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be free
of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
Parking for an extended period can
cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed
on the vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, the vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
Black plate (60,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-60 Vehicle Care
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of
the vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and
handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑44
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep the vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of the vehicle. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑57
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑57
for information on proper tire
rotation.
{WARNING
Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting to
mount or dismount a tire could
cause injury or death. Only your
dealer or authorized tire service
center should mount or dismount
the tires.
{WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to the
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with the compact
spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on the
vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 10‑83.
{WARNING
Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
Black plate (61,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-61
If you must replace the vehicle's
tires with those that do not have
a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load
range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and
bias‐belted tires) as the vehicle's
original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
Spec rated tires are installed on
the vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec
rated tires may give a
low‐pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper
warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑53.
The vehicle's original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12 for more information
about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location
on the vehicle.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can also be affected.
{WARNING
If different sized wheels are used,
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. This
increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑59 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3for
additional information.
Black plate (62,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-62 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Black plate (63,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-63
Traction –AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature –A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
one side or the other. If the vehicle
vibrates when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Black plate (64,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-64 Vehicle Care
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
{WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
and cause loss of control, causing
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑65 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{WARNING
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.
Black plate (65,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-65
Tire Chains
{WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove
the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle's wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout,
especially if the tires are maintained
properly. See Tires. If air goes out of
a tire, it is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if there is ever a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
Black plate (66,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-66 Vehicle Care
AA rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the
accelerator pedal and steer to
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
{WARNING
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has
been driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
{WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
{WARNING
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall
causing injury or death. Find a
level place to change the tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
Black plate (67,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-67
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
page 10‑75. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑67.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
{WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑22.
Black plate (68,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-68 Vehicle Care
{WARNING
Overinflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.
{WARNING
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
The kit includes:
A. On/Off Button
B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
C. Pressure Relief Button
D. Pressure Gauge
E. Air Only Hose (Black)
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Power Plug
Black plate (69,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-69
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the compressor.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister. The
sealant canister should be replaced
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister”following.
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister”following.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑65 for other important
safety warnings.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑74.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
Black plate (70,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-70 Vehicle Care
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B)
clockwise to the Sealant + Air
position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gauge (D) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (D). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑51.
The pressure gauge (D) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑8or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Black plate (71,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-71
11. Press the on/off button (A) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire;
therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately
after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
15. Return the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (G) back in
their original locations.
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister and place it in
a highly visible location. Do not
exceed the speed on this label
until the damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1 through 11 under
“Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without Sealant
to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑8or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico)
on page 13‑10.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, use the
compressor kit to inflate the tire
to the recommended inflation
pressure.
Black plate (72,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-72 Vehicle Care
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 mi) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑65 for other important
safety warnings.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑74.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)
and the power plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
Black plate (73,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-73
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B)
counterclockwise to the Air Only
position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to
turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (D). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑51.
The pressure gauge (D) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading. The
compressor may be turned on/
off until the correct pressure is
reached. If the tire is inflated
higher than the recommended
pressure, press the pressure
relief button (C), if equipped,
until the proper pressure
reading is reached. This option
is only functional when using
the air only hose (E).
11. Press the on/off button (A) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (E) from the tire
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
14. Return the air only hose (E)
and the power plug (G) back to
their original locations.
15. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
Black plate (74,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-74 Vehicle Care
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Remove the plastic cover.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from
the canister (A).
3. Pull up on the canister (A) to
remove it.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the
canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9.
2. Lift the cover.
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and
remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Black plate (75,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-75
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
The equipment you will need is in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9for more information.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
3. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the compact spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑83 for more information.
4. Remove the wing nut holding the
jack in place.
5. Remove the jack and wheel
wrench from the trunk.
Tire Changing Tools
The tools you will be using include
the wheel wrench (A) and jack (B).
1. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise to loosen
wheel wrench.
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from
the jack.
Black plate (76,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-76 Vehicle Care
3. Extend the handle on the wheel
wrench by pressing the button
and pulling on the end of the
wrench. You must do this before
using the wheel wrench.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑65.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover
or hubcap that has plastic wheel
nut caps, loosen the plastic nut
caps. You might need to use the
wheel wrench to loosen them.
Do not pry off wheel covers or
center caps that have plastic
wheel nut caps.
3. Remove the wheel cover or
center cap from the wheel to
locate the wheel nuts.
If the vehicle has a wheel cover
or hubcap without plastic wheel
nut caps, gently pry on the edge
of the plastic wheel trim to
remove it from the wheel to
locate the wheel nuts.
4. Use the wrench to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
Black plate (77,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-77
5. Position the lift head at the jack
location nearest the flat tire.
Make sure all of the jack lift
head is touching the jacking
flange under the body. Do not
place the jack under a body
panel.
6. Put the compact spare tire near
the flat tire.
{WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
{WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the
wrench clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room
for the compact spare tire to fit.
Black plate (78,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-78 Vehicle Care
8. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
9. Remove the flat tire.
{WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑65.
10. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare wheel.
11. Install the compact spare tire.
{WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on
with the rounded end toward
the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand or with the wrench until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
Black plate (79,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-79
13. Lower the vehicle by turning
the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
{WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2for the wheel nut
torque specification.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
shown, with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on the vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on
your compact spare tire. It will not
fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel
nut caps in the trunk until you have
the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Black plate (80,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-80 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools
{WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
To store the flat tire and jack in the
compact spare tire compartment:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9.
2. Remove the bolt extension (in
the yellow sleeve) from the jack
and remove the center cap from
the wheel.
3. Collapse the wrench using the
same button used to extend it.
4. Attach the wrench to the jack by
placing the tab on the wrench
into the hole on the side of the
jack. Then place the wrench
handle over the tab on the side
of the jack.
5. Raise the jack to the height
shown and lock the wrench onto
the jack.
Black plate (81,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-81
6. Place the jack over the bolt (A)
on the floor, making sure it
contacts the bolt. Thread the
jack retainer nut until it contacts
the jack.
7. With the valve stem up, place
the tire on the compartment floor
with the rear of the tire under the
trim panel. The tire may not lay
completely flat.
8. Line up the bolt with the wheel
center.
9. With the yellow cap in place to
prevent the wheel from being
scratched, screw the bolt
extension onto the bolt through
the wheel center hole.
10. Remove the yellow cap from
the bolt extension.
11. Secure the tire and wheel with
the larger wing nut.
A. Cover
B. Wing Nut
C. Extension
D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)
E. Nut
F. Jack
G. Bolt
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 10‑83.
Black plate (82,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-82 Vehicle Care
Storing the Spare Tire and
Tools
{WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑9.
2. Collapse the wrench using the
same button used to extend it.
3. Attach the wrench to the jack by
placing the tab on the wrench
into the hole on the side of the
jack. Then place the wrench
handle over the tab on the side
of the jack.
4. Raise the jack to the height
shown and lock the wrench onto
the jack.
5. Place the jack in the spare tire
well. Make sure the stow bolt
goes through the hole in the
center of the wrench on the jack,
with the base of the jack towards
the front of the vehicle. Turn the
jack retainer nut until it firmly
contacts the wrench. Do not
over tighten.
Black plate (83,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-83
6. Place the compact spare into the
tire compartment with the stow
bolt going through the center
hole of the wheel.
7. Turn the spare tire retainer nut
until it firmly contacts the wheel.
Do not over tighten.
Compact Spare Tire
{WARNING
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Black plate (84,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-84 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑26.
If the battery has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle
and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the
following steps to do it safely.
{WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.They contain acid that can
burn you.
.They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that
has a 12-volt system with a
negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
not have a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You
would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
systems.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
N (Neutral) before setting the
parking brake.
Notice: If the radio or other
accessories are left on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
Black plate (85,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-85
needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the
batteries. Find the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal
locations on each vehicle. Your
vehicle's positive (+) terminal
and negative (–) terminal are
located under a black cover on
the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6for more information
on location. Remove the cover
to access the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminals.
{WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{WARNING
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you don't, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do
not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some things you should
know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Black plate (86,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-86 Vehicle Care
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause
sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away from the
dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as
good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Black plate (87,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-87
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (–)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminals to their original
positions.
Black plate (88,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-88 Vehicle Care
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Notice: To avoid damage, the
disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the
ground. Care must be taken with
vehicles that have low ground
clearance and/or special
equipment. Always flatbed on a
car carrier.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing”in this
section.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle –such as behind a motor
home. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.What's the towing capacity of the
towing vehicle? Be sure to read
the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.How far will the vehicle be
towed? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
.Does the vehicle have the
proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering
professional for additional
advice and equipment
recommendations.
.Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Black plate (89,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-89
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing, the vehicle
should be run at the beginning of
each day and at each RV fuel stop
for about five minutes. This will
ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the
front with all four wheels on the
ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and
then secure it to the towing
vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park)
and turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the
following fuse from the
instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument
Panel Fuse Block on page 10‑38
for more information.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to
N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN
SENSOR fuse once the destination
has been reached.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Black plate (90,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-90 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing
Tow the vehicle with the two rear
wheels on the ground and the front
wheels on a dolly:
To tow the vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in
P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the key from the
ignition.
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
6. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle”later in this section.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Black plate (91,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-91
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather, and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam, or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Do not use cleaning
agents that are petroleum based
or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint,
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer.
Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product. Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Black plate (92,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-92 Vehicle Care
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Wheels and Trim —Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, because
the surface could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, as this
could cause damage. The repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Black plate (93,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.Extreme dusty conditions
.Sand and salt
.Heat and sun
.Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body and
paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Black plate (94,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-94 Vehicle Care
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Interior Care
The interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Dust and
dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
interior.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the interior. When cleaning
the interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the
surfaces that are being cleaned.
Permanent damage can result from
using cleaners on surfaces for
which they were not intended. Apply
the cleaner directly to the cleaning
cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove
any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors and
windows.
Black plate (95,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-95
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage.
.Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
.Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
.Cleaners that contain solvents
can damage the interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with rotating brushes in the nozzle
may only be used on floor carpet
and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
Black plate (96,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-96 Vehicle Care
Leather
Leather, and lighter colored leather
in particular, will need more frequent
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning
performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or
spot removers, or shoe polish on
leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings
that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Notice: Air fresheners contain
solvents that may cause damage
to plastics and painted surfaces.
Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when using air
fresheners in the vehicle. If air
freshener comes in contact with
paint or a plastic surface, blot
immediately with a soft cloth.
Damage caused by using air
fresheners would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Black plate (97,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Vehicle Care 10-97
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Floor Mats
{WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
.The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
.Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
.Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
.Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
.Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Black plate (98,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
10-98 Vehicle Care
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by two hooks.
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mat
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
remove it from the hooks.
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
up the openings in the floor mat
over the hooks and push it down
into position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedals.
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Replacement
Parts ....................... 11-7
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8
General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep
the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
.Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
.Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑35.
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
11-2 Service and Maintenance
{WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10‑4.
At your dealer, you can be certain
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained service
technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑7. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed.
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑57.
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Oil Soon
Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9.An
Emission Control Service.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON
message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Service and Maintenance 11-3
Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform this
work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13.
Every Engine Oil Change
.Change engine oil and filter.
Reset oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9and
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13.An Emission
Control Service.
.Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
.Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑23.
.Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑90. Worn or
damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑29.
.Tire inflation pressures check.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑51.
.Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑57.
.Rotate tires if necessary. See
Tire Rotation on page 10‑57.
.Fluids visual leak check (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and the
fluid level checked.
.Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑14.
.Brake system inspection (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
.Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
11-4 Service and Maintenance
.Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and rear compartment
hinges lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when the vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
.Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑24.
.Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
.Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
Additional Required Services
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
.Rotate tires. Tires should be
rotated every 12 000 km/
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation
on page 10‑57.
At Each Fuel Stop
.Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
.Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
.Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑23.
Once a Month
.Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑51.
.Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑57.
.Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped. See
Sunroof on page 2‑18.
Once a Year
.See Starter Switch Check on
page 10‑27.
.See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑27.
.See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑28.
.See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑28.
.Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
.If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of the kit.
See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑67.
.Underbody flushing service.
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Service and Maintenance 11-5
.Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
Support Gas Strut Service:
Visually inspect gas strut,
if equipped, for signs of wear,
cracks, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of the gas
strut. Contact your dealer if
service is required.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑14.
.Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑14.
.Evaporative control system
inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed. An
Emission Control Service. The
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency or the California Air
Resources Board has
determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the
vehicle's useful life. We,
however, urge that all
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑14.
.Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection. An
Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill (or every five
years, whichever occurs first).
See Cooling System on
page 10‑16.An Emission
Control Service.
.Engine drive belts inspection for
fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
11-6 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑9.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen
®
Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System (if
equipped) GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Service and Maintenance 11-7
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side –60.0 cm (23.6 in) 25800624 —
Passenger Side –53.0 cm (21.0 in) 25800623 —
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
11-8 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Service and Maintenance 11-9
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
11-10 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Services Performed
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2for the vehicle's
engine code.
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
.Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.Model designation.
.Paint information.
.Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Application Capacities
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt
3.6L V6 Engines 9.4 L 9.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt
Fuel Tank 61.7 L 16.3 gal
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Technical Data 12-3
Application Capacities
Metric English
Transmission Fluid*
6—Speed Automatic Transmission
(RPO X23F) —(Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt
6—Speed Automatic Transmission
(RPO 6T70) —(Drain and Refill) 6.0 L 6.3 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y100 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑14 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 Engine U Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
2.4L L4 Engine 1 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)
3.6L V6 Engine 7 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.044 in)
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.4L L4 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-1
Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada) .................... 13-1
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and
Canada) .................... 13-7
Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Scheduling Service
Appointments (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Courtesy Transportation
Program (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Collision Damage Repair
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-18
OnStar
®
.................... 13-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada)
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
.Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
.Dealership name and location.
.Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
STEP THREE —U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
®
Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-3
STEP THREE —Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico)
Did you get the Warranty Extension
Plan? This plan is recommended by
General Motors to supplement the
warranty included with the new
vehicle purchase.
See your dealer for details.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-4 Customer Information
Customer Assistance
Procedure
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
very important to your dealer and
General Motors.
Normally, any problem with the
transaction, sale, or usage of the
vehicle must be handled by your
dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that despite
the good intentions of all parties
involved, sometimes a
misunderstanding may occur.
If you have a problem that has not
been satisfactorily handled through
the normal means, we suggest the
following steps:
STEP ONE
Explain your case to the dealer
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
manager, depending on your case.
Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are
interested in your continual
satisfaction.
STEP TWO
If you are not satisfied, please
contact the general manager or the
dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the
right people at General Motors for
support, if needed.
STEP THREE
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
dealer, please call the General
Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
following information:
.Name
.Address
.Phone number
.Model year
.Brand
.Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.Mileage
.Delivery date
.Description of the problem
.Dealership name
.Dealership address
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-5
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5for more
information.
Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada)
Chevrolet encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America, and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de
R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico)
To contact the Customer Assistance
Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section.
Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-6 Customer Information
Mexico
From Mexico City
5329-0811
From Other Mexico Locations
01-800-466-0811
United States and Canada
1-866-466-8190
Costa Rica
00-800-052-1005
Guatemala
1-800-999-5252
Panama
00-800-052-0001
Dominican Republic
1-888-751-5301
El Salvador
800-6273
Honduras
800-0122-6101
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users (U.S. and Canada)
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY
user in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Online Owner Center
Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
www.chevyownercenter.com
Information and
services customized for your
specific vehicle —all in one
convenient place.
.Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more.
.Storage for online service and
maintenance records.
.Chevrolet dealer locator for
service nationwide.
.Exclusive privileges and offers.
.Recall notices for your specific
vehicle.
.OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries.
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-7
Other Helpful Links
Chevrolet —www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
Help Center —www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.FAQ
.Contact Us
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
access to:
.My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.My Dealers: Save details such
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
.My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
.My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
(U.S. and Canada)
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for the vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-8 Customer Information
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and
Canada)
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.Your name, home address, and
home telephone number.
.Telephone number of your
location.
.Location of the vehicle.
.Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.
.Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
.Description of the problem.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-9
Services Provided
.Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.Lock‐Out Service: Service to
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
before this service is given.
.Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
.Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
.Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.Legal fines.
.Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
.Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-10 Customer Information
.Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be
over 250 kilometers from
where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
.Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico)
Roadside Assistance is available
24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.
For detailed information about
Roadside Assistance, please see
the brochure provided with your new
vehicle or visit our website at:
www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate
the site and click on “Asistencia en
el Camino.”E-mail correspondence
should be sent to:
asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com.
To contact Roadside Assistance by
phone, use the following numbers:
Mexico
01-800-466-0800
United States
1-866-466-8901
Canada
1-800-268-6800
Scheduling Service
Appointments (U.S. and
Canada)
When the vehicle requires warranty
service, contact the dealer and
request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
of your transportation needs, the
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call the
dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day-repair.
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-11
Courtesy Transportation
Program (U.S. and
Canada)
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
hybrid‐specific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information”furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, the dealer can
offer one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of the dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See
the dealer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-12 Customer Information
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
The dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact the
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the
right to unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
(U.S. and Canada)
If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Black plate (13,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-13
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for the vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. The dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring The Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
Black plate (14,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-14 Customer Information
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑8or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Gather the following information:
.Driver name, address, and
telephone number.
.Driver license number.
.Owner name, address, and
telephone number.
.Vehicle license plate number.
.Vehicle make, model, and
model year.
.Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.Insurance company and policy
number.
.General description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts”earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑31.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
Black plate (15,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-15
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The
Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Black plate (16,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-16 Customer Information
Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Black plate (17,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-17
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
like this, notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
This GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, the vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help the dealer technician
service the vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
Black plate (18,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-18 Customer Information
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.How various systems in the
vehicle were operating.
.Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened.
.How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal.
.How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Black plate (19,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
Customer Information 13-19
OnStar
®
If the vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
may also record data in crash or
near crash‐like situations. The
OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
pressing the Qbutton and
speaking to an advisor.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Black plate (20,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
13-20 Customer Information
2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
INDEX i-1
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-31
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27
Airbags
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Antenna
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Audio System
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Automatic
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-24
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-18
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
i-2 INDEX
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34
Taillamps, Turn
Signal and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 10-32
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Charging
System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-48
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Black plate (3,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
INDEX i-3
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-18
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
i-4 INDEX
E
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-31
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Engine (cont.)
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-23
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-18
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
F
Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Black plate (5,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
INDEX i-5
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Requirements, California . . . . .9-36
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Fuel Economy
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
G
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Heating and Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
i-6 INDEX
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-52
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-27
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-15
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Light
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)/Traction Conrol
System (TCS) Indicator
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Lighting
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-18
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Black plate (7,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont.)
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-15
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
N
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Black plate (8,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
i-8 INDEX
Oil (cont.)
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-39
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
OnStar
®
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
P
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Black plate (9,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
INDEX i-9
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-31
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-24
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Black plate (10,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
i-10 INDEX
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-8
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service (cont.)
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Black plate (11,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
INDEX i-11
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-30, 10-32
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Tires (cont.)
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-53
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-42
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-29
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2011
i-12 INDEX
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-74
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
W
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-30
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29

Navigation menu